Lincoln 2019 MKT Owner’s Manual

lincolncanada.com
2 0 19 M KT O wne r ’s Manua l
KE9J 19A321 AB
owner.lincoln.com
2 01 9 M K T
O w n e r ’s M a n u a l
July 2018
Second Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
DID_3512377_19b_MKT_Owner_Manual_EN-US_062618.indd 1
6/29/18 10:04 AM
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications,
design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language
in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201803 20180618114656
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your
hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Introduction
About This Manual ...........................................7
Symbols Glossary .............................................7
Data Recording ...............................................10
Perchlorate .......................................................12
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
..........................................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation
..........................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment .........14
Export Unique Options ..................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment .........................15
Child Restraint Positioning ..........................35
Child Safety Locks .........................................37
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................38
Fastening the Seatbelts ...............................39
Seatbelt Height Adjustment ........................43
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ...........................................................44
Seatbelt Reminder .........................................45
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance
.........................................................................46
Seatbelt Extension .........................................47
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .............................48
At a Glance
Instrument Panel Overview ..........................16
Child Safety
General Information .......................................18
Installing Child Restraints ............................20
Booster Seats .................................................32
Supplementary Restraints System
Principle of Operation ..................................49
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................50
Front Passenger Sensing System .............52
Side Airbags ....................................................54
1
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Safety Canopy™ ..............................................55
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .........57
Airbag Disposal ..............................................58
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio Frequencies
........................................................................5 9
Remote Control ..............................................60
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
.........................................................................63
MyKey™
Principle of Operation ..................................64
Creating a MyKey ..........................................65
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................66
Checking MyKey System Status ................66
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
........................................................................6 6
MyKey Troubleshooting ...............................66
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................68
Keyless Entry ....................................................71
Table of Contents
Liftgate
Lighting
Instrument Cluster
Power Liftgate .................................................74
General Information ......................................86
Lighting Control .............................................86
Autolamps ........................................................87
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .......................88
Headlamp Exit Delay ....................................88
Daytime Running Lamps ..............................89
Automatic High Beam Control ...................89
Front Fog Lamps .............................................91
Adaptive Headlamps .....................................91
Direction Indicators .......................................92
Interior Lamps .................................................92
Ambient Lighting ...........................................93
Gauges ...........................................................100
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..................101
Audible Warnings and Indicators .............104
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ...........................77
Anti-Theft Alarm .............................................79
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ....................80
Audio Control ..................................................81
Voice Control ...................................................81
Cruise Control .................................................81
Information Display Control ........................82
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................82
Windows and Mirrors
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals .....................................83
Wipers and Washers
Autowipers ......................................................84
Windshield Washers .....................................84
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ............85
Power Windows .............................................94
Global Opening and Closing ......................95
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................95
Interior Mirror ..................................................97
Sun Visors ........................................................97
Moonroof .........................................................98
2
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
General Information ....................................105
Information Messages .................................112
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control ........................125
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
.......................................................................126
Rear Passenger Climate Controls ............127
Heated Rear Window ..................................128
Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................128
Cabin Air Filter ..............................................129
Remote Start ..................................................129
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position ...................130
Head Restraints .............................................131
Power Seats ...................................................133
Table of Contents
Memory Function .........................................135
Rear Seats ......................................................137
Heated Seats .................................................146
Climate Controlled Seats ...........................147
Fuel and Refueling
Traction Control
Principle of Operation .................................189
Using Traction Control ................................189
Universal Garage Door Opener ...............149
Safety Precautions .......................................164
Fuel Quality ...................................................165
Fuel Filler Funnel Location ........................165
Running Out of Fuel ....................................166
Refueling .........................................................167
Fuel Consumption ........................................170
Auxiliary Power Points
Engine Emission Control
Parking Aids
Auxiliary Power Points ................................154
Emission Law ..................................................171
Catalytic Converter ......................................172
Principle of Operation .................................192
Rear Parking Aid ...........................................192
Active Park Assist .........................................193
Rear View Camera .......................................199
Universal Garage Door Opener
Storage Compartments
Center Console ............................................156
Overhead Console .......................................157
Transmission
Starting and Stopping the Engine
All-Wheel Drive
General Information ....................................158
Keyless Starting ............................................158
Starting a Gasoline Engine ........................159
Engine Block Heater ...................................162
Principle of Operation .................................190
Using Stability Control .................................191
Automatic Transmission ..............................175
Cruise Control
Using All-Wheel Drive .................................179
Principle of Operation ................................203
Using Cruise Control ..................................203
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ................204
Brakes
General Information .....................................187
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.......................................................................188
Parking Brake ................................................188
3
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Stability Control
Driving Aids
Driver Alert .....................................................212
Lane Keeping System .................................214
Blind Spot Information System .................219
Table of Contents
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................222
Steering .........................................................225
Collision Warning System .........................226
Drive Control ................................................229
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage ..........................231
Cargo Nets .....................................................231
Luggage Covers ...........................................231
Load Limit ......................................................232
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................237
Trailer Sway Control ...................................238
Recommended Towing Weights .............238
Essential Towing Checks ..........................240
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......243
Driving Hints
Breaking-In ...................................................245
Economical Driving .....................................245
Driving Through Water ..............................245
Floor Mats .....................................................246
Roadside Emergencies
Fuses
Roadside Assistance ..................................248
Hazard Flashers ..........................................249
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................249
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................250
Post-Crash Alert System ...........................252
Transporting the Vehicle ...........................253
Fuse Specification Chart ...........................262
Changing a Fuse .........................................278
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ...............254
In California (U.S. Only) ..............................255
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .......................256
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only) ..........................................257
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada ......................................................258
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
......................................................................260
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) ......260
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
.......................................................................261
4
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Maintenance
General Information ....................................281
Opening and Closing the Hood ..............282
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L ...................283
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L ...................284
Engine Oil Dipstick .....................................286
Engine Oil Check ........................................286
Oil Change Indicator Reset .......................287
Engine Coolant Check ...............................288
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check .....292
Brake Fluid Check ......................................294
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................295
Washer Fluid Check ...................................295
Changing the 12V Battery .........................295
Checking the Wiper Blades ......................297
Changing the Wiper Blades .....................297
Adjusting the Headlamps .........................298
Removing a Headlamp ..............................300
Changing a Bulb ..........................................300
Table of Contents
Changing the Engine Air Filter .................301
Vehicle Care
General Information ....................................303
Cleaning Products ......................................303
Cleaning the Exterior .................................304
Waxing ...........................................................305
Cleaning the Engine ...................................306
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
......................................................................306
Cleaning the Interior ...................................307
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................309
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................309
Repairing Minor Paint Damage .................310
Cleaning the Wheels ...................................310
Vehicle Storage .............................................311
Body Styling Kits ...........................................312
Wheels and Tires
General Information .....................................313
Tire Care .........................................................315
Using Snow Chains ....................................328
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...........329
Changing a Road Wheel ............................333
Technical Specifications ............................340
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 3.5L .....................343
Engine Specifications - 3.7L ......................344
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L ...............................345
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L ................................346
Vehicle Identification Number ..................347
Vehicle Certification Label ........................347
Transmission Code Designation .............348
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L ......349
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L ......355
Bulb Specification Chart ............................362
General Information ...................................369
Home Screen ...............................................384
Using Voice Recognition ...........................386
Entertainment ...............................................396
Climate ............................................................410
Phone ..............................................................414
Navigation .....................................................422
Apps ................................................................433
Settings ..........................................................436
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ........................456
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................474
Lincoln Protect
Audio System
Lincoln Protect .............................................476
General Information ....................................364
Audio Unit .....................................................366
USB Port ........................................................367
Media Hub .....................................................367
5
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ..........479
Normal Scheduled Maintenance ............483
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance .............................................487
Table of Contents
Scheduled Maintenance Record ............490
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ...................511
End User License Agreement ...................516
Type Approvals ............................................547
6
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about your vehicle,
the greater the safety and pleasure you will
get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the vehicle
you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
A
Right-hand side.
B
Left-hand side.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
Air conditioning system
E162384
E231157
7
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Introduction
Anti-lock braking system
Child safety door lock or unlock
Explosive gas
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Child seat lower anchor
Fan warning
Battery
Child seat tether anchor
Fasten seatbelt
E71880
Battery acid
Flammable
Cruise control
E231160
E71340
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Front airbag
Do not open when hot
E67017
Brake system
Engine air filter
Brake system
Engine coolant
Cabin air filter
Engine coolant temperature
Check fuel cap
Engine oil
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
E270480
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
8
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Introduction
Windshield defrosting system
Panic alarm
See Service Manual
E231158
Interior luggage compartment
release
Parking aid
Service engine soon
Parking brake
Passenger airbag activated
E139213
Jack
E270849
Keep out of reach of children
Passenger airbag deactivated
Power steering fluid
E270850
E161353
Lighting control
Power windows front/rear
Low tire pressure warning
Power window lockout
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
E167012
Maintain correct fluid level
E138639
E231159
Note operating instructions
Stability control
Requires registered technician
Hill descent control
Safety alert
E163957
Horn control
Trail control
See Owner's Manual
E271982
E270945
Windshield wiping system
E270969
9
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Introduction
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada in Canada), and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted
by law, use vehicle diagnostic information
for vehicle improvement or with other
information we may have about you, (for
example, your contact information), to offer
you products or services that may interest
you. Data may be provided to our service
providers such as part suppliers that may
help diagnose malfunctions, and who are
similarly obligated to protect data. We retain
this data only as long as necessary to
perform these functions or to comply with
law. We may provide information where
required in response to official requests to
law enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with lawful
authority or court order, and such information
may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S.
only (if equipped), if you choose to use
connected apps and services, such as SYNC
Vehicle Health Report or MyFord Mobile App,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used to
provide services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you products
and services that may interest you, where
permitted by law. For Canada only, for more
information, please review the Ford of
Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca,
10
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
including our U.S. data storage and use of
service providers in other jurisdictions who
may be subject to legal requirements in
Canada, the United States and other
countries applicable to them, for example,
lawful requirements to disclose personal
information to governmental authorities in
those countries.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
Introduction
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
11
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
Introduction
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
12
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
P.O. Box 542000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate that these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A
great way to know for sure you are getting
this level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused to
your vehicle as a result of failed non-Ford
parts. For additional information, refer to the
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
WARNING: You risk death or serious
injury to yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
13
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction
with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle
diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming
services. Installing an aftermarket device that
uses the DLC during normal driving for
purposes such as remote insurance company
monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to
other devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
Introduction
interference with or even damage to vehicle
systems. We do not recommend or endorse
the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless
approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will
not cover damage caused by an aftermarket
plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
14
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
Environment
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor Company's
sustainability progress and initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
15
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
E232262
16
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
At a Glance
A
Air vent.
K
B
Wiper lever. See Autowipers (page
84).
Climate controls. See Climate
Control (page 125).
L
C
Direction Indicators. See Direction
Indicators (page 92).
Keyless start button. See Keyless
Starting (page 158).
M
D
Information display control. See
Information Display Control (page
82).
Audio control. See Audio Control
(page 81).
N
Horn.
O
Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 80).
E
Instrument cluster. See Instrument
Cluster (page 100).
F
Information display control. See
Information Display Control (page
82).
P
Cruise control switches. See
Using Cruise Control (page 203).
Q
G
Audio system. See Audio System
(page 364).
Hood release. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 282).
R
H
Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard
Flashers (page 249).
Instrument panel dimmer control.
See Instrument Lighting Dimmer
(page 88).
I
Information and entertainment
display.
S
Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 86).
J
Passenger airbag indicator light.
See Front Passenger Sensing
System (page 52).
17
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
18
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise
very quickly. Exposure of people or animals
to these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child
Child size, height, weight, or age
Recommended restraint type
Infants or toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Small children
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Larger children
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a beltUse a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft. snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if centered across the shoulder and chest, and
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
seatback upright.
19
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
•
•
•
You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 52).
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Properly restrain
children 12 and under in the rear seat
whenever possible.
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age
four or younger).
20
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child restraint
and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
• For second-row seating positions, adjust
the recliner slightly to improve child
restraint fit. If needed, remove the head
restraints.
• For third-row seating positions, stow the
head restraints to improve child restraint
fit. See Head Restraints (page 131).
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child restraint with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint illustrated
is a forward facing child restraint, the steps
are the same for installing a rear facing child
restraint.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
21
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Standard seatbelts
Child Safety
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is
not twisted.
E142531
E142875
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until you
pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
22
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
child is added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness of
the child restraint to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
buckle provides extra help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
10.
Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 in
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that exists once the extra weight of the
E142534
23
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Inflatable seatbelts
E142530
E146522
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
24
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is
not twisted.
Child Safety
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
E146523
E146524
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
25
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
Child Safety
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that exists once the extra weight of the
child is added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness of
the child restraint to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
buckle will additionally help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
E142534
10.
Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 in
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
26
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
Child Safety
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seatback and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether
anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach
the child restraint. However, you can still use
the seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
attach the top tether strap must to the proper
top tether anchor if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child restraint.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
Second-row bucket seats and third-row
passenger side
Second row bench seat (livery)
E190825
Second-row bench seats and third-row
passenger side
E211194
E190826
E144054
27
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child restraint
with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating
Use)
WARNING: The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH lower
anchors for the center seating position
unless the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using
anchors spaced at least as far apart as
those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in
(52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing for
LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm) center
to center. You cannot install a child restraint
with rigid LATCH attachments at the center
seating position. You can only use LATCH
compatible child restraints (with attachments
on belt webbing) at this seating position
provided that the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child restraint to any lower anchor if an
adjacent child restraint is attached to that
anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child restraint from side to side and
forward and back where it is secured to your
vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in
(2.5 cm) when you do this for a proper
installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
28
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap
if the tether strap on your safety seat does
not reach the appropriate top tether anchor
in your vehicle.
Child Safety
Once you install the child safety seat using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the
LATCH system, or both, you can attach the
top tether strap.
Second row bench seats and third row
passenger side
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
Second row bucket seats and third row
passenger side
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
E190828
Second row bench seat (livery)
E190827
E190829
E210818
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
29
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Placement of the tether strap
• Second row outboard seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seatback, under the head
restraint and between the head restraint
posts. If needed, remove the head
restraint to improve the fit of the child
safety seat or tether strap.
• Second row center seat positions: Route
the child safety seat tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. If needed,
remove the head restraint to improve the
fit of the child safety seat or tether strap.
See Head Restraints (page 131).
• Third row seat position: Route the child
safety seat tether strap over the
seatback, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down to
improve the fit of the child safety seat or
tether strap. See Head Restraints (page
131).
1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be twisted
½ turn to improve installation. If the
tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend its
use.
Second row bucket (40/40)
E190833
E190830
30
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
Second row bench (60/40)
E190831
Second row bench seat (Livery)
E223334
31
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
1. You may need to move the load floor
rearward to gain access to the top tether
anchors.
2. After attaching the tether strap, reposition
the load floor.
Third row seat
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.
E190832
Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less than
age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
E142595
•
•
32
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat backrest with knees
bent comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head (as
measured at the tops of the ears) above the
top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position
with a higher seat backrest or head restraint
and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using
a high back booster seat.
E68924
E70710
•
•
•
•
•
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Backless booster seats
High back booster seats
33
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
34
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
35
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger
to hold a child on their lap when your
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, books
or towels to boost your child's height.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
Child Safety
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back.
Failure to follow this instruction could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Restraint Type
Combined Weight
of Child and Child
Restraint
Rear facing child
restraint
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
restraint
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Top
Tether Anchor)
LATCH (Lower
Anchors Only)
Seatbelt and LATCH
(Lower Anchors and
Top Tether Anchor)
X
Seatbelt Only
X
X
X
36
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seatbelt and Top
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
Child Safety
Right-Hand Side
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
130).
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
37
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always be
properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.
38
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may
be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine.
The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small
child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the
vehicle should always properly wear their
seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking
mode, (except driver seatbelt and rear
inflatable seatbelt).
Seatbelts
•
•
•
Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
Belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E71880
•
Seatbelt warning light and chime.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
E67017
•
Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to activate
in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and
in rollovers. The seatbelt pretensioners at
the front seating positions are designed to
tighten the seatbelts firmly against the
occupant’s body when activated. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the seatbelts.
In frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners
can be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a click and feel it latch. Make sure you
securely fasten the tongue in the buckle.
39
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Seatbelts
Third Row Seatbelt Stowage
WARNING: Make sure to put both
portions of the shoulder belt in the
stowage clip. Putting only one portion of
the shoulder belt in the stowage clip
increases the amount of belt slack and may
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt in
the event of a crash.
E210820
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low across
the hips below the belly and worn as tight
as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt
to cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Keep the outer and inner shoulder belts
together in the stowage clip to prevent the
potential of wrinkling the cargo shade.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
E210819
To stow the seatbelt, grasp both portions of
the shoulder belt together in one hand and
slide them into the seatbelt stowage clip as
shown.
40
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
Seatbelts
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard passenger
and rear seatbelts have both the vehicle
sensitive locking mode and the automatic
locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination seatbelts lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If the
seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower the
height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to
retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull
the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear
seat backrest or push the seat backrest
cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically
pre-locks. The belt retracts to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver
seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in a
rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 18).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Non-inflatable seatbelts
41
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt
is now in the automatic locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second
row only–if equipped)
Seatbelts
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull
upward until you pull the entire belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child safety
car seats and belt positioning booster seats
when properly installed. This is because they
are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a
lower pressure and at a slower rate than
traditional airbags. After inflation, the
shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool
to the touch.
42
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder seatbelt
webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 57).
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts functions like
standard restraints in everyday usage.
Seatbelts
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body than
regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure
on the chest and helps control head and
neck motion for passengers.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes, some
side impact crashes and rollovers. The fact
that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate
in a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation.
Stowing the Rear Inflatable Seatbelt
The rear inflatable seatbelt has a snap
retainer for stowing the seatbelt against the
quarter trim panel when it is not in use. This
prevents the seatbelt tongue from rattling
against the side of the seat and keeps it out
of the way when folding or tumbling the
second row seats.
E146365
43
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E209845
Press the retainer on the seatbelt onto the
mating snap to stow. To use the seatbelt,
pull it away from the quarter trim panel.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt
height adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure to
adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Seatbelts
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
indicator chime will sound if the
E71880
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
E209844
Conditions of operation
If
Then
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and the indicator chime sounds
to the on position...
for a few seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the warning lamp is illuminated
and the indicator chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to
the on position...
The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime remain off.
44
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
unbuckled.
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
the system turning on the Belt-Minder feature
for objects you place on the front passenger
seat, only the front seat passengers receive
warnings as determined by the front
passenger sensing system.
If...
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
Then...
You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illuminyour vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2 minutes elapse ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
after you switch the ignition on...
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
more than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
45
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING: While the system allows
you to switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear your
safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if you have
previously disabled the Belt-Minder, it will
be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See
MyKey™ (page 64). .
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step 2,
wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 20 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
46
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child safety
seat systems periodically to make sure they
work properly and are not damaged. Inspect
the vehicle and child restraint seatbelts to
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.
Replace if necessary. All vehicle seatbelt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front seatbelt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat backrest (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
Seatbelts
We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies
in use in vehicles involved in a crash be
replaced. However, if the crash was minor
and an authorized dealer finds that the belts
do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use
during a crash should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 303).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by Lincoln Motor
Company dealers. The dealer will provide
an extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the fit of the belt across the
torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
47
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Lincoln Motor Company dealers. Only Lincoln
seatbelt extensions made by the same
company which made the original equipment
seatbelts, should be used with Lincoln
seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your
extension is compatible with your Lincoln
vehicle restraint system.
Personal Safety System™
This system provides an improved overall
level of frontal crash protection to front seat
occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The
system analyzes different occupant
conditions and crash severity before
activating the appropriate safety devices to
help better protect occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
•
•
Restraint system warning light and tone.
The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front
seatbelt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and seatbelt
usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
seatbelt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
48
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and right
front passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there
is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them
after inflation.
49
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
50
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
Supplementary Restraints System
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 57).
E67017
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
51
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Supplementary Restraints System
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger seat and seatbelt to
detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
•
E253275
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled).
The indicator lamp is in the center stack of
the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
off and on indicator lamps illuminate for a
short period of time when you first switch the
ignition on to confirm it is functional.
52
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also
turns off the passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the
passenger seat is empty.
•
When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator illuminates the off
lamp and stays lit to remind you that the
front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp, then switch the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
Supplementary Restraints System
•
•
Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to detect
that person and enable the passenger
frontal airbag.
If the indicator off lamp remains lit even
after this, advise the person to ride in the
rear seat.
When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator illuminates the on
lamp and remains illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
Occupant
Passenger airbag status indicator
Passenger airbag
Empty
OFF: Lit
Disabled
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
•
ON: Unlit
Child
OFF: Lit
Disabled
ON: Unlit
Adult
OFF: Unlit
ON: Lit
53
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Enabled
Supplementary Restraints System
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator off light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
E67017
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 57).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 254).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
54
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an airbag
as you could be seriously injured or killed.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will not function
again. The side airbag system (including
the seat) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
Supplementary Restraints System
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
SAFETY CANOPY™
E67017
•
Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 57).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to
your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
55
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary
restraint system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 57).
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
Always properly restrain children 12 years
old and under in the rear seats. The Safety
Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or
booster seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
E75004
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
56
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted side
airbags, the Safety Canopy and rear
inflatable safety belts. Based on the type of
crash, the restraints control module will
deploy the appropriate safety devices.
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
57
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal, side and
rollover crashes.
•
•
The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side crashes. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation.
The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes and
when a certain likelihood of rollover is
detected by the rollover sensor. The
Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of
rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
58
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
59
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of any exterior door
handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an
intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 60).
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the key
blade, then pull the blade out.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
battery.
1. Remove the key blade from the remote
control.
E138616
The remote control operate the power locks
and the remote start system. The key must
be in your vehicle to use the push button
start.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of the remote control batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
E142431
60
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.
Keys and Remote Controls
The horn sounds and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
sounds twice and the direction indicators do
not flash.
E138622
Sounding the Panic Alarm
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto
the remote control and install the key
blade.
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
switch it off.
E138624
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes,
do not use remote start if your vehicle is
parked indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
61
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
remote control.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from the outside. The remote control has an
extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle
is remote started. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 125).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system does not work if any
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
Keys and Remote Controls
•
•
The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was driven.
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 105).
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the vehicle
runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on
the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 10 minutes, the duration
extends by another 10 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 20
minutes. You can extend the remote start
up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
E138626
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
To start your vehicle remotely:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 105).
62
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Press the button once. The
parking lamps switch off.
Keys and Remote Controls
Memory Feature
You can program the remote control to recall
memory setting positions. See Memory
Function (page 135). Press the unlock button
on the remote control to recall the memory
positions.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 77).
63
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be activated
with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a MyKey
and an admin key are present when you
start your vehicle, the system recognizes the
admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder. You
cannot disable this feature. The audio
system will mute when the front seat
occupants’ safety belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid, blind
spot information system (BLIS), cross
traffic alert, lane departure warning and
forward collision warning system.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions
(available only in some markets).
64
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a
MyKey and before you recycle the key or
restart the vehicle. You can also change the
settings afterward with an admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe
speed considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
MyKey™
•
•
•
Various vehicle speed reminders so you
know when your vehicle approaches the
limits. Warnings appear in the information
display and an audible warning sounds
when you exceed the limit.
Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control, 911 Assist or
Emergency Assistance, or Do Not Disturb
(if your vehicle is equipped with these
features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 159). If your vehicle is
equipped with a push-button start, place
the remote control into the backup slot.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
77).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to change the settings of your
MyKey. From the MyKey menu select the
option Create MyKey. See Information
Displays (page 105).
4. When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
65
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming and
Changing Configurable Settings.
Programming and Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to change the settings of your
MyKey. See Information Displays (page
105).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
MyKey™
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status at once. To clear
all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the
information display.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to begin clearing your MyKey
programming. See Information Displays
(page 105).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You cannot
remove the MyKey restrictions individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys
have been deleted.
Number of Admin Keys
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to determine how many admin keys you have
for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Lincoln-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Lincoln-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
66
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Number of MyKeys
MyKey™
Condition
Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey.
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.
Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into the backup slot. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 77).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at
least one admin key.
The passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
The transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 65).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 65).
I lost the only admin key.
Purchase a new key or transmitter from an authorized dealer.
I lost a key.
Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see an authorized dealer. See Passive AntiTheft System (page 77).
The MyKey distance does not accumu- The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
late.
An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.
No MyKey functions with the transmitter.
An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.
There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 65).
67
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
A
Unlock.
B
Lock.
Remote Control
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when you
press the unlock button once. All door mode
unlocks all doors when you press the unlock
button once. The unlocking mode applies
to the remote control, keyless entry keypad
and intelligent access.
Press the button to lock all doors.
The direction indicators will flash.
You can use the remote control at any time.
68
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will
sound twice and the direction indicators will
not flash.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with
the Key Blade
Locking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
Unlocking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the direction indicators will flash if all the
doors and the liftgate are closed.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you only switch
off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.
Doors and Locks
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
Activating Intelligent Access
You can unlock and lock the vehicle without
taking the keys out of your pocket or purse
when your intelligent access key is within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access
uses a sensor on the back of the door handle
for unlocking and a separate sensor on the
face of each door handle for locking.
The system will not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a
cell phone.
E248555
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor
on the back of the door handle for a brief
period and then pull on the door handle to
unlock, being careful to not touch the lock
sensor at the same time or pulling the door
handle too quickly. The intelligent access
system requires a brief delay to authenticate
your intelligent access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248556
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 60).
69
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle to
confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button on
the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. See
Power Liftgate (page 74).
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
Doors and Locks
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key inside
your vehicle after you close the last door. If
the system finds a key, all of the doors will
immediately unlock and the horn will sound
twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front of
the door handle with another intelligent
access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle attains a speed greater than
4 mph (7 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of
the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are closed
and your vehicle has been in motion at
a speed greater than 4 mph (7 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the accessory
position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
70
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors will not
autounlock.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
To enable or disable autounlock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn sounds
indicating your vehicle is in programming
mode.
6. Press the power door lock control and
within five seconds, press the power door
unlock control. The horn sounds once if
disabled or twice if enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn sounds
indicating programming is complete.
Doors and Locks
Illuminated Entry
Battery Saver
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on and the
engine is not running, the battery saver will
turn the ignition off when it detects a certain
amount of battery drain, or after 45 minutes
have elapsed.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
71
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
• Recall memory seat and mirror positions.
Doors and Locks
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box
and is available from an authorized dealer.
You can also program up to five of your own
five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
• Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
72
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times. This
mode turns off the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any of
the following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 68).
73
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Liftgate
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure to close and
latch the liftgate to prevent drawing
exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will
also prevent passengers and cargo from
falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate
open, keep the vents or windows open so
outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure
to follow this warning could result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
gas strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds
and the liftgate closes under control. Remove
any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area before
using the power liftgate control.
74
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One tone sounds if the ignition is on and
the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three tones sound if the battery voltage
is below the minimum operating voltage.
• One tone sounds if the vehicle speed is
at or above 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
Liftgate
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Activating the obstacle detection feature.
Note: This could damage the liftgate and its
components. Do not leave the liftgate open
while driving.
From the Instrument Panel
With the transmission in park (P),
press the button on the instrument
panel.
Obstacle Detection
Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3.3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
Closing
E211252
2. Press the liftgate release button hidden
above the license plate.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
75
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three tones sound and the system
reverses to open. When you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Liftgate
Note: Entering your vehicle when the liftgate
is closing can activate obstacle detection.
To prevent this, allow the power liftgate to
fully close before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound. When
you remove the obstacle, you can continue
to operate the liftgate.
76
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock®
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in engine
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may result in vehicle starting problems,
especially if they are too close to the key
when starting your vehicle. Prevent these
objects from touching the coded key when
starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition off,
move all objects on the key chain away from
the coded key and restart your vehicle if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
coded key, it is not operating correctly. A
message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
77
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and turns on the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your coded keys are lost or stolen and you
do not have an extra coded key, you need
to erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Store a spare intelligent access key away
from your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle
and the new unprogrammed intelligent
access keys readily accessible. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
Security
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Carry out all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and
wait for at least one minute before starting
again if you carry out any steps out of
sequence.
2
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot and press the push button
ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
E198728
78
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Security
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If
programming remains unsuccessful, contact
an authorized dealer.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
•
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
•
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
79
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 130).
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
E261582
80
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
A new stopping position sets. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
stops just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 135).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch the
ignition off. Switch the ignition on to return
the system to its previous settings. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
105).
Steering Wheel
Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column
may move up and in.
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
Seek, Next or Previous
CRUISE CONTROL
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E173610
See Using Cruise Control (page 203).
V
V
E272897
A
Volume up.
B
Volume down.
C
Seek up and down or next.
E173609
A
Phone mode.
B
Voice recognition.
81
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Type One
Steering Wheel
Type Two
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and off
using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
E173611
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
204).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
E173617
See Information Displays (page 105).
82
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Pedals
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING: Never use the controls
while your feet are on the accelerator and
brake pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 135).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A
B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
83
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Wipers and Washers
AUTOWIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the autowipers. When you select low
sensitivity, the wipers operate when the
sensor detects a large amount of water on
the windshield. When you select high
sensitivity, the wipers operate when the
sensor detects a small amount of water on
the windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit
the windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
In these conditions, you can do the following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on the
windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
E208497
•
•
•
E256816
84
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
A brief press and hold causes the wipers
to swipe three times with washer fluid.
A long press and hold turns on the wipers
and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds.
Wipers and Washers
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Rear Window Washer
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to switch on the rear washer.
The control returns to the 2 or 0 position
when you release it.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.
Rear Window Wiper Blade
E208498
2
Intermittent wipe.
1
Low speed wipe.
0
Off.
85
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lighting
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes in
air pressure.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
GENERAL INFORMATION
LIGHTING CONTROL
A
B
C
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
E156651
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
86
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
A
Lamps off.
B
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
C
Headlamps.
Lighting
Headlamp High Beam
E167827
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E163268
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high beam
off.
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
87
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E158778
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps turn on in low light
situations, or when the wipers turn on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Lighting
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
•
•
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When you use the windshield washer.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
•
E163270
Tap the top or bottom of the control to
brighten or dim all interior lit components
incrementally.
Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until you
reach the desired lighting level.
Press and hold the top of the control to
the full on position to activate the “dome
on” feature. This turns on the interior
courtesy lights. The lights remain on until
you press the bottom of the control.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
Adjust the brightness of the instrument panel
and all applicable lit components in the
vehicle during headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Set the delay time to keep the headlamps
on for up to three minutes after switching off
the ignition.
Follow the steps below to change the delay
time:
Note: Complete steps 1 through 6 within 10
seconds.
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control.
88
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lighting
3. Switch the lighting control to the off
position.
4. Switch the ignition on.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control. The headlamps and
parking lamps turn on.
7. Switch the lighting control to the off
position when reaching the required
delay time. The headlamps and parking
lamps turn off.
Set the headlamp exit delay to one of the
following settings:
• Off.
• 10 seconds.
• 20 seconds.
• 120 seconds.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the lighting
control to any position except headlamps.
Note: Adjust the time delay using the display
controls in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105).
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps
or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the
system turns off high beams before they can
distract other road users. Low beams remain
on.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
89
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
Lighting
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to turn the high beams
on and off.
Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
The system turns the high beams off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (43 km/h).
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
105).
E158778
The indicator illuminates to confirm
when the system is ready to assist.
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Autolamps (page
87).
Overriding the System
Pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
temporary override to low beam.
90
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lighting
FRONT FOG LAMPS
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (If Equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
B
E156823
Pull the lighting control toward you to switch
the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except off.
E161714
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display.
91
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lighting
Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system operates when you drive
your vehicle.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
System Check (If Equipped)
INTERIOR LAMPS
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When you start your vehicle, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the outer edge of the clear
lens on the front row map lamp.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Second Row Reading Lamps
E173272
Third Row Dome Lamps (If Equipped)
Type One
Front Row Map Lamps
E163274
To switch on the lamps, press the outer edge
of the clear lens.
E163272
E166237
92
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lighting
Type Two
E273192
E166240
You can switch the lamps on or off by sliding
the control.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
Select ambient lighting.
E279027
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Touch a color once.
Changing the Color
Touch any color once.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the selected color up or down.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch the selected color once or drag the
selected color down to zero brightness.
93
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power windows. They
may seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
One-Touch Down
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
Window Lock
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
E144072
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
WARNING: When you override the
bounce-back feature the window will not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
94
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.
Windows and Mirrors
Accessory Delay
The window switches remain operational for
several minutes when you switch the ignition
off or until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General Information
(page 105).
Closing the Windows
WARNING: When closing the
windows and moonroof, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make
sure that children and pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof, press
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Opening the Windows
Power Exterior Mirrors
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows and vent the
moonroof. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or unlock
button to stop movement.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving.
95
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E144073
A
Left-hand mirror.
B
Adjustment control.
C
Right-hand mirror.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the
position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Puddle Lamps
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your transmitter
to unlock the doors or when you open a
door.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If Equipped)
C
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 128).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 135).
Auto-dimming Feature
The driver exterior mirror automatically dims
with the auto-dimming interior mirror.
Direction Indicator Mirrors
While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot
mirror are closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex
mirror built into the upper outboard corner
of the exterior mirrors. They can assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your
vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder
to verify traffic is clear, and carefully change
lanes.
96
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
B
A
E138665
Windows and Mirrors
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the main
mirror when it is at a distance. The image
becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image transitions
from the main mirror and begins to appear
in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle
approaches (B). The vehicle transitions to
your peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
See Blind Spot Information System (page
219).
INTERIOR MIRROR
Second Row Illuminated Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
E210723
Pull the cover down to turn on the lamp.
SUN VISORS
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
E138666
97
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not let children play
with the moonroof or leave them
unattended in the vehicle. They may
seriously hurt themselves.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, you should verify that it is free
of obstructions and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
Note: Do not attempt to move the sunshades
manually or sunshade damage or
malfunction may occur. The sunshade track
clips are designed to release the sunshade
crossbar in order to prevent damage to the
system. If this happens, you may need to
slide the sunshade crossbar ends back into
position to regain proper function. Contact
an authorized dealer for proper moonroof
or sunshade operating, diagnostic or repair
instructions.
Note: If the moonroof is excessively
operated, the glass and shade motors go
into a fail-safe jog mode. This mode allows
manual intermittent operation to prevent
overheating or damage to the motor. The
motors return to normal operation after a
period of idle time.
98
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The moonroof and sunshade controls are on
the overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. There is only one
control in the center position if the vehicle
has a fixed glass roof. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening the Sunshade and Moonroof
Note: The moonroof only opens after the
sunshades completely open.
E210724
Press and release the control to open the
sunshade. The front and rear sunshades
open simultaneously.
Press and release the control to open the
moonroof. The moonroof stops short of the
fully opened position.
Windows and Mirrors
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof (If Equipped)
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT control
to close the moonroof.
Closing the Moonroof and Sunshades
Note: The sunshades only close after the
moonroof completely closes.
E210724
Pull and release the control. The moonroof
stops short of the fully closed position. Pull
the control again and hold to fully close the
moonroof.
Pull and release the control to close the
sunshades. The sunshades stop short of the
fully closed position. Pull the control again
and hold to fully close the sunshades.
99
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Note: Cluster shown in standard measure –
metric clusters similar.
GAUGES
E216191
100
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Instrument Cluster
A
Left information display. See
General Information (page 105).
B
Speedometer.
C
Right information display. See your
SYNC information.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Anti-Lock Braking System
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
E144524
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 204).
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp
is also illuminated. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned on.
Turns off when the speed control system is
turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is engaged.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
Airbag Readiness
If this light fails to illuminate when
you switch the ignition on,
E67017
continues to flash or remains on, it
indicates a malfunction. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer. A tone
sounds when there is a malfunction.
101
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.
Instrument Cluster
Brake System Warning Light
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
E144522
It illuminates when you engage the
parking brake and the ignition is
on.
If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving,
make sure the parking brake is disengaged.
If the parking brake is disengaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system fault. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
If it stays on when the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a problem
with the electrical system or a related
component.
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch the
system on.
See Using Cruise Control (page
203).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 300).
Charging System
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly.
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 288).
Engine Oil
It illuminates when you switch the
ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine is
running this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. If the oil level is sufficient, this
indicates a system malfunction. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
See Engine Oil Check (page 286).
102
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Door Ajar
Instrument Cluster
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp
E71880
It illuminates and a chime sounds
until you fasten the seatbelts.
Front Fog Lamps
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
E156133
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It will also illuminate momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure the
display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Illuminates when you do not
completely close the liftgate.
Low Fuel Level
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.
Head Up Display (If Equipped)
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates if the tire pressure in
one or more tires is below the
correct tire pressure.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
103
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power
Illuminates when a powertrain or
an AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine is
running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring.
Increased exhaust gas temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter or other
vehicle components. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
immediately serviced.
Instrument Cluster
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether your vehicle is ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 171).
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Stability Control
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 191).
E138639
Keyless Warning Alert
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
Stability Control Off
It illuminates when you switch the
system off.
E130458
104
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION
Information Display Controls
•
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•
•
•
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back to
the main menu.
•
•
•
E216192
105
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A check
E204495
in the box indicates the feature is
enabled, and unchecked indicates the
feature is disabled.
•
Display Mode
Trip 1 & 2
Fuel Economy
Information Displays
•
•
Driver Assist
Settings
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
Display Mode
Option 1
XXX mi (km) to empty, Fuel gauge and Total odometer
Option 2
Round tachometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometer
Option 3
Round tachometer, Engine coolant temp gauge, Fuel gauge and Total odometer
Option 4
Digital speedometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometer
Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST), the cluster will change to the round
tachometer if not already selected.
XXX mi (km) to empty
Fuel gauge
Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel
tank reaches empty. The value is dynamic
and can change (raise or lower) depending
on driving style.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is in
the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
pump symbol shows the fuel filler door side
of your vehicle. When the fuel level becomes
low, the level indicator will change to amber.
When the fuel level becomes critically low,
the level indicator will change to red.
106
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel
warnings will display earlier.
Information Displays
Round tachometer
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Trip 1 & 2
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute. Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear will appear in the
display.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
Choose between the following trip displays.
Trip 1 & 2
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.
Average fuel economy
Fuel Economy
Trip distance
Shows the average fuel economy for a given
trip.
Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy display.
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
107
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
Inst. Fuel Economy
Instantaneous fuel usage
X
XX. Min Fuel History
Fuel usage over a 30 minute time span
X
Average fuel economy
Always Present
XXX mi (km) to empty
Total odometer (lower left corner)
Press and hold the OK to reset the currently displayed fuel usage information.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
30 Min Fuel History
Driver Assist
This display shows a bar chart of your fuel
history.
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
Collision Warn
Sensitivity
High, Normal or Low
108
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Cross Traffic
Cruise Control
Adaptive or Normal
Driver Alert
Driver Alert
Driver Alert Disp.
Front Park Aid
Lane Keeping Sys
Mode
Alert, Aid or Both
Intensity
High, Normal or Low
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Sway
Settings
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
109
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Vehicle
Drive Control
Handling in D
Sport, Normal or Comfort
Handling in S
Sport or Normal
Auto Engine Off
DTE Calculation
Normal or Towing
Easy Entry / Exit
Lighting
Locks
Adaptive Head Lamps
Traffic Set Up
Auto Highbeam
On or Off
Autolamp Delay
Select time interval
Autolock
Autounlock
Remote Unlocking
All doors or Driver door
Oil Life Reset
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset
Power Liftgate
Enable Switch or Disable Switch
Remote Start
Climate Control
Auto or Last Settings
Seats and Wheel or Seats
Auto Heated or Off
110
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Right Hand or Left Hand Traffic
Information Displays
Settings
Duration
5, 10 or 15 minutes
System
Windows
Remote Open
Remote Close
Wipers
Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
MyKey
Mykey Status
MyKeys and Admin Keys
Create MyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKey
911 Assist
Always On or User Selectable
Traction Control
Max Speed
Choose desired speed or off
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
On or Off
Do Not Disturb
Always On or User Selectable
MyKey Report
On or Off
Clear MyKeys
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
111
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Display Settings
Distance
Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/l
Gauge Display
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + Tach
Language
Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to Set
Temperature
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if
a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
E173229
112
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message
Action
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 204).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 204).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in
front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 204).
AdvanceTrac™
Message
Action
Service AdvanceTrac
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.
AdvanceTrac Off On
The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.
113
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Alarm
Message
Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle. Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key
on the driver's side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering, the
ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires. See Anti-Theft Alarm
(page 79).
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message
Action
Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine is getting ready to shut off.
Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.
Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to Override
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
114
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
AWD
Message
Action
AWD OFF
Displays if the AWD system disables to protect itself. This may occur if you operate the vehicle
after installing the compact spare tire, if the system is overheating or if there is an issue with
another vehicle system that prevents the AWD system from operating. The AWD system resumes
normal operation and clears this message after you install the road tire and you switch the ignition
on and off, or after you allow the system to cool. If this message remains on, have a qualified
technician service your vehicle to repair other vehicle systems.
Check AWD
Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control / Transmission / AWD light when the AWD
system is not operating properly. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 101). If the warning
stays illuminated or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
115
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
Message
Action
Check Charging System
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehicle
has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical
loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
116
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message
Action
Blindspot System Fault
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 219).
Vehicle Coming From X
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 219).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind
See Manual
Spot Information System (page 219).
Cross Traffic System Fault
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake System
Message
Action
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 294).
Check Brake System
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph (5
km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
117
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Collision Warning System
Message
Action
Collision Warning Malfunction
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather
or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Doors and Locks
Message
Action
X Door Ajar
The door listed is not completely closed.
Trunk Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.
Engine ON
The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the engine is on.
118
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
Message
Action
Fuel Level Low
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message
Action
To START Press Brake
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.
No Key Detected
The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 158).
Restart Now or Key is Needed
The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not
detected inside your vehicle.
Accessory Power is Active
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.
Starting System Fault
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.
Key Programmed x Keys Total
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is programmed to the system.
Max Number of Keys Learned
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have been programmed.
119
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
Message
Action
Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.
Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.
Maintenance
Message
Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 286).
Oil Change Required
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 286).
120
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Message
Action
Engine Coolant Over Temperature
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.
Washer Fluid Level Low
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.
Drive Control Malfunction Service Required
There is a malfunction with one of the features that is a part of your drive control system. See
an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
Displays when the steering system needs service. See your authorized dealer.
Power Steering Assist Fault
The power steering system has disabled power steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.
Message
Action
MyKey not Created
MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .
MyKey Active Drive Safely
MyKey is active.
Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top Speed
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80
mph (130 km/h).
MyKey
121
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Message
Action
Check Speed Drive Safely
Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a
preselected speed.
Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.
Could Not Program Integrated Key
An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.
Park Aid
Message
Action
Check Park Aid
Displayed when the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is disabled. See Rear Parking
Aid (page 192).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displayed when the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is disabled. See Rear Parking
Aid (page 192).
Rear Park Aid On Off
The park aid status.
122
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
Message
Action
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Service Power Steering Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Seats
Message
Action
Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the seat, if the warning
stays on or continues to come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
123
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message
Action
Tire Pressure Low
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 329).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 329).
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more information on
how the system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
329). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Traction Control
Message
Action
Traction Control Off
Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using Traction Control (page 189).
Transmission
Message
Action
Shift to Park
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any position other than P (Park).
124
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Press and release to adjust the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
Press and release + or - on the left-hand side
of the climate control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Press and release + or - on the right-hand
side of the climate control to set the
right-hand temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on automatic operation,
then set the temperature.
The system adjusts the blower motor speed,
air distribution, air conditioning operation,
and outside or recirculated air to reach and
maintain the temperature you have set.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone
mode by pressing and holding the button for
more than two seconds.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off
Press and release the button to
switch the air conditioning on or
off.
Use air conditioning with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, for example,
maximum defrost, the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off
Press and release the button.
125
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Switching Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to
distribute air through the
windshield air vents and de-mister.
Air directed to the instrument panel and
footwell air vents turns off. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear the windshield
of a thin covering of ice.
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning
On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to
LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
Climate Control
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may reduce
the time needed to cool the interior, when
used with A/C, and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or
prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather in order to
improve cooling efficiency.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool the
interior to the temperature you select as
quickly as possible.
Note: For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
126
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs air flow to
the windshield and side window air vents. In
addition, the blower motor may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press and release MAX A/C.
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE
CONTROLS
Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed
Directing Air to the Overhead Air Vents
or Rear Footwell Air Vents
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather
1. Press and release defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press and release the button to direct airflow
to the overhead air vents or the rear footwell
air vents or both.
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator
E265289
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front controls.
127
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E265389
Turn the control to adjust the volume of air
circulated in the rear passenger
compartment.
Climate Control
Setting the Rear Temperature
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled
Seats On and Off (If Equipped)
E265282
Press and release the button to
cycle through the various climate
controlled seat settings and off.
See Climate Controlled Seats (page 147).
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On
and Off (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Press and release the button to
cycle through the various heat
settings and off.
E265862
See Heated Seats (page 146).
Turn the control to set the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment.
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch on rear automatic operation,
then set the temperature.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
E184884
heated rear window turns off after
a short period of time.
Note: Make sure the engine is on before
operating the heated windows.
128
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle Warranty may not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER
REMOTE START
Automatic Settings
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display.
In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and AUTO is on in the information
display).
You can locate the cabin air filter behind the
glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 479).
The system adjusts the interior temperature
depending on your chosen settings during
remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control setting
during remote start operation. When you
switch the ignition on, the climate control
system returns to the previous settings. You
can now make adjustments.
You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
129
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on previous settings). The
rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated or
cooled seats do not turn on.
In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if
available, and AUTO is on in the information
display). The heated rear window and heated
mirrors turn on.
Seats
•
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too
far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the
seatback too far as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in serious injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the top of the seat backrest.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death in the event of
a sudden stop or crash.
•
•
•
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest so that
your torso is more than 30° from the
upright position.
130
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt
over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Front Seat Head Restraints
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
A
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B
Two steel stems.
C
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
D
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
Adjusting the Head Restraint
E138642
Second Row Center Seat Head Restraint
(If Equipped)
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
E138645
131
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The head restraints consist of:
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
The head restraints consist of:
1. Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second Row Outermost Seat Head
Restraints
A
B
C
A
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B
Two steel stems.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
buttons.
The outermost head restraints are
non-adjustable, but they can be removed.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
E162872
1. Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Push the head restraint down until it
locks.
132
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Third Row Head Restraints (If Equipped)
E190836
The head restraints consist of:
A
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B
Two steel stems.
C
Fold strap.
Folding the Head Restraint
Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head restraint
back up to reset.
Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
power folding seats to fold the head
restraint.
Seats
Tilting Head Restraints
(If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort.
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
E144727
133
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback while your
vehicle is in motion may cause loss of
control of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
Seats
E210821
134
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seats
Power Lumbar (Limo/Livery)
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
E210822
Press the front or rear of the control to adjust
firmness or softness.
The memory control is on the driver door.
Press the top or bottom of the control to raise
or lower the height of the lumbar support.
E138648
Four Way Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
The lumbar control is located on the side of
the seat cushion.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
135
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E142554
Seats
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The memory features move to the position
stored for that preset.
You can recall a programmed memory
position:
• Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if the
ignition is on.
• In any gearshift position if the ignition is
not on.
You can also recall a programmed memory
position by:
• Pressing your remote control transmitter
unlock button (if the remote control is
programmed to a memory position).
• Unlocking your vehicle with an intelligent
access key (if it is programmed to a
memory position).
Note: Using a linked keyfob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Adjusting any active memory feature
or pressing a memory switch during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
features to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone sounds
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until you hear a second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or intelligent access key is in range, the
memory function moves to the settings of
the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit and
entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2 in
(5 cm) rearward when the transmission is in
park (P) and you switch the ignition off.
The driver seat and steering wheel return to
their previous positions when you switch the
ignition on.
136
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seats
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105).
Recline Adjustment
Moving the Seats Backward and Forward
(If Equipped)
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
Second Row Seats
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback
can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat's seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
E209847
Note: For the bench seat only, make sure
the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Lift the handle to adjust the seatback
rearward or forward. You can also fold the
seatback forward until it is flat. For the livery
version, you cannot fold the seatback flat or
tumble it forward.
137
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E190838
Second-Row Power Lumbar Support (If
Equipped)
The power lumbar control is on the outboard
side of the seat.
Seats
Moving the Front Passenger Seat Backward
and Forward (Livery)
This feature is available for the right-hand
seat on seven-passenger vehicles and on
both sides for six-passenger vehicles.
E210823
Press the top of the control to adjust
firmness. Press the bottom of the control to
adjust softness.
E210824
Press the control on the passenger side rear
door to move the front passenger seat
backward and forward.
Power Fold and Tumble Seat (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it is
occupied. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
138
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E190848
The control is at the back of the rear door
opening. Press it to fold the seatback down
and tumble the seat forward for access to
the third row.
Seats
Third Row Seats (Accessing the Seat)
Note: When you switch the ignition off, the
power fold feature works until the battery
saver turns it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Doors and Locks
(page 68). Keep the key in the accessory or
run position to prevent the feature from
timing out.
Rear Seat Armrest (Livery)
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the
cup holders. Hard objects can injure you
in a crash.
E210825
To access the cupholders, rotate the armrest
into the use position. To open the storage
compartment, pull the cupholder latch
forward.
WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or
release a seat floor latch when the vehicle
is moving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
with a seat that is unlatched or in the
folded position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
139
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seats
Note: Remove items from the second-row
seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before
tumbling them.
1. Lift the handle on the side of the seat.
The seatback folds flat.
Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front-row
seat forward to allow the second-row seat
to be fully tumbled.
Fold and tumble the second-row seat to
access the third row.
E190845
E190844
2. Lift the handle all the way up until the
seat releases from the floor. Rotate the
seat forward to allow access to the third
row. Note: The seatback must be folded
flat in order to release the floor latches.
Make sure that there are no objects on
the seat cushion that may restrict the
seatback from folding flat.
3. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E209848
E209849
140
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seats
4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
Note: The seatback will not raise if the rear
latch hooks are not properly engaged to the
floor striker. If the seatback does not raise,
then repeat Step 4.
Third Row Seat Exit
1. Pull on the strap on the back of the
second row seat. This folds the seatback
forward. Pull the strap a second time to
tumble the seat forward, allowing easy
exit from the third row seat. Note: You
must fold the seatback flat in order to
release the floor latches. Make sure that
there are no objects on the seat cushion
that may restrict the seatback from
folding flat.
E209849
3. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then repeat
steps 3 and 4.
E190850
E209850
2. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
141
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seats
E209852
E190847
E210069
4. Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.
1. From the rear of the vehicle, stow the
head restraints by pulling the strap on
the middle of the seatback just below the
head restraint. Then, fold the seatback
by pulling and holding the red strap while
pushing the seatback forward. Release
the strap once the seatback starts
rotating forward.
Stowing the Third Row Seat
Note: Remove all objects from the seat and
stowage tub. Objects in the seat or stowage
tub may cause serious damage to the seat
upholstery and cause improper seat function.
142
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
2. Release the cushion latches by pulling
the short black strap while pulling on the
strap at the top of the seatback. This
tumbles the seat all the way into the floor
tub.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.
Seats
Unstowing the Third Row Seat
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward and
forward. Not securing the seat into the
locked position can be dangerous in a
crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
E209853
Note: Do not use the third row seatback as
a load floor when the seatback is folded.
Sharp objects may result in damage to seat
upholstery.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or brief cases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the load
floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: Make sure the area under the forward
portion of the load floor is free of objects
before unstowing the third row seat.
143
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E209854
1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of the floor
tub by squeezing and pulling up on the
handle. Once the seat is at a vertical
position, push the seat over, letting it fall
onto the latches.
Seats
2. To return the seatback to the upright
position, pull the red strap. Then, while
holding the red strap, pull the long strap
on the seatback to raise the seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to their normal
positions.
PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If Equipped)
E209852
The third row seat features a power
one-touch operation that allows you to adjust
the left, right, or both seats into a NORMAL,
STOW, FOLD, or TAILGATE position with just
one touch of a button.
144
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
tailgate is open. If the ignition is off and the
feature is still running, the battery saver turns
it off after 10 minutes. You can reactivate the
power seats by pressing the unlock button
on the remote entry key fob or by using the
unlock procedure on the keyless entry
keypad. See Keyless Entry (page 71). Keep
the key in the accessory or run position to
prevent the feature from timing out.
The third row power seat buttons are behind
the third row seats on the left-hand quarter
trim panel.
Seats
E209855
A
Press to return the seat to the
normal seating position.
B
Press to stow the seat into the tub
floor.
C
Press the top of the button to fold
down the seatback. Press the
bottom portion of the button to put
the seat into the tailgate position.
Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
the obstacle can be removed.
D
Press to select either right-hand
seat, the left-hand seat or both.
Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.
145
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Seats
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the load
floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
Note: In the unlikely event that the third row
power seat stops prematurely or travels to
an unexpected position, press the FOLD
button (C) to reset the seat and return it to
a normal position.
WARNING: Do not sit in seats that
are rearward facing when your vehicle is
moving. This is not a correct seating
position and the seatbelts do not properly
function this way. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in a sudden stop or crash.
E245760
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
146
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
E146322
Seats
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Second-Row Heated Seats (If Equipped)
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
WARNING: Persons who are unable
to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat
heater. The seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion,
because this may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with
pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater
to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
147
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that may block the
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
can cause the heated seat to overheat. Do
not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
Your vehicle has lifetime air filters that are
integrated with the seats. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not required.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
Second-Row Climate Controlled Seats (If
Equipped)
The controls for the second-row climate
controlled seats are on the rear of the floor
console. They function the same as the
front-row climate controlled seats.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
148
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
E142657
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
149
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
Universal Garage Door Opener
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
150
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
Universal Garage Door Opener
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
151
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E142660
Universal Garage Door Opener
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
A
B
E142661
A.
Red indicator light
B.
Green indicator light
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 in
(2–8 cm) of the button on the visor you
want to program.
152
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
Universal Garage Door Opener
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
153
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• Near the floor inside the front console
bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• Inside the luggage compartment.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This damages the
power point and may blow the fuse.
154
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so may
cause the power point to overload due to
powering multiple devices that can reach
beyond the 150 watt load limit and could
result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
Auxiliary Power Points
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
E194174
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
155
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Storage Compartments
Console Refrigerator and Freezer (If
CENTER CONSOLE
D
Auxiliary power point.
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
E
Rear storage compartment.
F
Auxiliary power point or cigar
lighter.
G
Rear climate controls.
Equipped)
Available console features include:
Second Row Center Console (If Equipped)
A
B
This feature operates when the vehicle is on
or in accessory mode. Limit the time of use
when the vehicle is in accessory mode to
avoid the battery running out of charge. You
should only use this feature when the vehicle
is running.
C
E213208
A
Lane keeping system and active
park assist.
B
Cup holder.
C
Center storage compartment with
auxiliary power point and USB
ports.
E211653
E211652
A
Cup holder, auxiliary power point,
and AC power point.
B
Armrest.
C
Utility compartment and
refrigerator unit.
156
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Flip the console lid forward, then lift off the
cover to open the cooling compartment.
Make sure to replace the cover after using
it. This helps maintain a more consistent
cooling temperature.
Storage Compartments
Refrigerator: Briefly press and hold COOL.
The indicator light on the cool side of the
switch illuminates and the indicator light on
the freeze side glows when the refrigerator
is active. The temperature cools to
approximately 41°F (5°C). Briefly press and
hold COOL again to switch off the
refrigerator. Briefly press and hold FREEZE
to change to freezer mode.
Freezer: Briefly press and hold FREEZE. Both
indicator lights illuminate when the freezer
is active. The temperature cools to
approximately 23°F (-5°C). Press FREEZE
again to switch off the freezer. Press COOL
to change to refrigerator mode.
This feature turns off when you switch the
vehicle off. It turns back on to the last mode
when you restart the vehicle.
Cleaning and Maintenance
E211654
Note: Condensation on the inside walls of
the refrigerator is normal under certain
conditions.
This feature is maintenance free, but you can
clean the inside of the unit and the cover
with a mild soap and water solution.
157
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km)
after you reconnect it. This is because the
engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can disregard any
unusual driving characteristics during this
period.
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
158
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
•
Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
•
Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
•
Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears
in the information display alerting you that
you exceeded the cranking time. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
159
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle to shift the transmission
out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
Starting and Stopping the Engine
2
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the passive key in this position, you
can use the push button ignition switch
to switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close a
door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key. You
cannot start your vehicle if the system does
not detect a valid passive key within 20
seconds.
Fast Restart
Failure to Start
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
E198728
160
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the engine
if it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information display
showing a timer counting down. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle
shuts down. Another message appears in
the information display to inform you that
your vehicle has shut down to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for example
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the feature
off for the current ignition cycle only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
161
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shuts
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when the vehicle is still moving will result
in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block
heater. This could damage the power cable
and may cause an electrical short resulting
in fire, injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
162
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
Starting and Stopping the Engine
•
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
163
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
•
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately
call a physician, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects
of fuel may not be apparent for hours.
164
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
•
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive
or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can
cause serious illness and permanent
injury.
Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through
the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin,
clothing or both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and thoroughly
wash your skin with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact
causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
fuel vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. Immediately call a physician if
you experience any adverse reactions.
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high
altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
below 87. The use of these fuels could result
in engine damage that will not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well as
other conditions, for example when towing
a trailer. See Towing (page 237).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle
and engine performance. For additional
information, refer to www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
165
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
storage tray.
Fuel and Refueling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
166
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or
push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in
the household refuse or the public sewage
system. Use an authorized waste disposal
facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 165).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
may not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING
A
B
C
D
Refueling System Overview
A
B
C
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
A
Fuel filler door.
B
Fuel tank filler valve.
C
Fuel tank filler pipe.
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
167
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E206911
E267248
A
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
B
Right-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
Fuel and Refueling
C
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
D
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
A
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds
before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
168
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep the fuel
pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler
pipe.
Fuel and Refueling
A
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
E119081
E139203
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B
when refueling. Holding the fuel pump
nozzle in position A can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.
A
B
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove
it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you have
filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close,
a message could appear in the information
display.
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
169
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel
filler funnel provided with your vehicle
into the fuel filler pipe. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 165). This action
should dislodge any debris that may be
preventing the fuel tank filler valve from
fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler
funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
Fuel and Refueling
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is the
break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
FUEL CONSUMPTION
•
•
•
•
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in the
advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The
empty reserve is an unspecified amount of
fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the
fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures
through the trip computer average fuel
function. See General Information (page
105).
Impacting Fuel Economy
•
•
•
•
Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
Fully loading your vehicle.
Carrying unnecessary weight.
Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 165).
Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
170
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Engine Emission Control
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal floor.
Failure to follow these instructions may
result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components. Similar
federal or provincial laws may apply in
Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle
modification without first determining
applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions control
systems including related sensors
or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system
can result in reduced engine power and the
illumination of the service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by any
person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
171
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive exhaust
smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
Engine Emission Control
•
•
•
•
An open or pinched sensor hose.
Incorrect engine oil level.
Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic
conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter
that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you correct
the concern, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
preceding statements concerning prohibited
tampering acts and maintenance, and the
noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide,
are applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
172
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue
to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 250).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Engine Emission Control
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Lincoln,
Motorcraft or Lincoln-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service of
components affecting emission control, such
non-Lincoln parts should be equivalent to
genuine Lincoln Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
173
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 167).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city and highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
Engine Emission Control
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
your vehicle may need service.
See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
174
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours with the ignition off. Then, start the
vehicle and complete the above driving
cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its
normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the vehicle until
the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
WARNING: Always apply the parking
brake fully and make sure you shift into
park (P). Switch the ignition off and remove
the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired
gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
P
N
S
D
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through all gears.
Sport (S)
E142628
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P).
Reverse (R)
With the selector in reverse (R), your vehicle
moves backward. Always come to a
complete stop before shifting into and out
of reverse (R).
175
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
With the selector in neutral (N), your vehicle
can be started and is free to roll. Hold the
brake pedal down while in this position.
Drive (D)
R
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
Neutral (N)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
• Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to enhance
performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain
or mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy.
• Provides gear selection more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
Transmission
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission (If
Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission. The SelectShift
Automatic transmission gives you the ability
to change gears up or down (without a
clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift makes some downshifts for you,
it still allows you to downshift at any time as
long as the SelectShift determines that
damage will not be caused to the engine
from over-revving.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing
the + button. Notice should be taken of the
shift indicator lamp, which alerts you when
to shift to make sure you achieve the highest
level or efficiency and fuel economy.
•
•
Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
If equipped with the toggle on the gearshift
lever, press the + toggle switch on the side
of the gearshift lever to activate SelectShift.
•
•
Press the (+) button to upshift.
Press the (-) button to downshift.
E144821
SelectShift in drive (D):
• Provides a temporary manual mode for
performing more demanding maneuvers
where extra control of gear selection is
required (for example, when towing or
overtaking). This mode will hold a
selected gear for a temporary period of
time dependent on driver inputs (for
example, steering or accelerator pedal
input).
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
E142629
176
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If equipped with steering wheel paddles,
pull the + paddle on the steering wheel to
activate SelectShift.
Transmission
SelectShift in sport (S):
• Provides a permanent manual gear
selection where full control of gear
selection is required.
To exit SelectShift mode shift the
transmission into another gear (for example,
drive [D]).
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for
best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1-2
15 mph (24 km/h)
2-3
25 mph (40 km/h)
3-4
40 mph (64 km/h)
4-5
45 mph (72 km/h)
5-6
50 mph (80 km/h)
The instrument cluster displays your currently
selected gear. If a gear is requested but not
available due to vehicle conditions (low
speed, too high engine speed for requested
gear selection), the current gear will flash
three times.
Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the
transmission automatically downshifts for
maximum performance.
Note: In low traction conditions, you can pull
away in second gear using SelectShift. To
perform this operation, select drive (D) or
sport (S) mode and press the + toggle (if
equipped) or pull the + paddle (if equipped)
until 2 is displayed on the cluster. Your
vehicle is now ready to move in 2nd gear.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
until you verify that the brake lamps are
working.
177
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
apply the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if
appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the ignition
is in the on position and the brake pedal is
not pressed.
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of
park (P) position with the ignition in the on
position and the brake pedal pressed, a
malfunction may have occurred. It is possible
that a fuse has blown or your vehicle’s brake
lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 262).
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of
your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission
may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This
operation is considered normal and does not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps
are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition
off and remove the key.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
E224615
2. Remove the access plug on the side of
the center console.
3. Apply the brake pedal. Using a suitable
tool (for example, a screwdriver), push
the brake-shift interlock override lever
forward while pulling the gearshift lever
out of park (P) and into neutral (N).
4. Install the access plug on side of the
center console.
5. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle,
and release the parking brake.
178
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power
the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot. The AWD system is active all the time
and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in
which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating
your vehicle under other than those
conditions could subject the vehicle to
excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present,
the warning Check AWD displays in the
information display. The AWD system is not
functioning correctly and defaults to
front-wheel drive. When this warning
displays, have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
179
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to front-wheel
drive. This may occur if the vehicle is
operated in extreme conditions with
excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand.
To resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine has been restarted and the
AWD system has adequately cooled, the
AWD OFF message will turn off and normal
AWD function returns. If the engine is not
stopped, the AWD OFF message turns off
when the system cools and normal AWD
function returns.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
All-Wheel Drive Messages
AWD Messages
Action / Description
AWD OFF
Displays if the AWD system disables to protect itself. This may occur
if you operate the vehicle after installing the compact spare tire, if the
system is overheating or if there is an issue with another vehicle
system that prevents the AWD system from operating. The AWD
system resumes normal operation and clears this message after you
install the road tire and you switch the ignition on and off, or after you
allow the system to cool. If this message remains on, have a qualified
technician service your vehicle to repair other vehicle systems.
Check AWD
Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction/reduced
power light when the system is not operating properly. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires
A spare tire of a different size other than the
tire provided should never be used. The
AWD system may disable automatically and
enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components if a non-full sized tire
is installed. This condition may display an
AWD OFF message in the information
display. If there is an AWD OFF message in
the information display from using a non-full
sized spare tire, this indicator should turn off
after reinstalling the repaired or replaced
normal road tire and cycling the ignition off
and on. It is recommended to reinstall the
repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between
180
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
the front and rear axles (for example, 17 inch
low profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Mismatched Tires
WARNING: Only use replacement
tires and wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver's door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
WARNING: The use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch high
profile tires on the rear axle) could cause the
AWD system to stop functioning and default
to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system. However, the AWD system is
capable of tolerating any combination of new
and worn tires of the same original tire size.
For example, using 3 worn tread tires and 1
new tread tire all of the same original tire
size, can be tolerated by the AWD system.
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on
and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
•
•
181
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving In Special Conditions With AllWheel Drive (AWD)
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
•
•
•
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into
park (P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
182
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
•
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (that is, turn the steering
wheel only as rapidly and as far as
required to avoid the emergency).
Excessive steering will result in less
vehicle control, not more. Additionally,
smooth variations of the accelerator
and/or brake pedal pressure should be
utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering,
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
•
•
acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal
injury. Use all available road surface to
return the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a maneuver
(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip through
Brake, Engine, and AWD calibrations.
However, during low speed driving, disabling
traction control in deep sand can help keep
the wheels moving to maintain vehicle
momentum.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This could
cause the AWD system to overheat and
default to front-wheel drive. If this occurs,
an AWD OFF message displays in the
information display. To resume normal AWD
function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle
in a safe location and stop the engine for at
least 10 minutes. After the engine has been
restarted and the AWD system has
adequately cooled, the AWD OFF message
turns off and normal AWD function returns.
In the event the engine is not stopped, the
AWD OFF message turns off when the
system cools and normal AWD function
returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L (Low)
gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
183
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance may be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with
caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rear
axle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will use.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side.
Do not drive in reverse over a hill without
the aid of an observer.
184
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Snow and Ice
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral; instead, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking as you could lose control. The
front wheels have to be turning in order to
steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire chains
or cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end
of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
185
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 188).
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do
not make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (such as lowering kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts
not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver and
passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended
if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway
usage.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. Ford Motor Company recommends
that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such
as ladder or luggage racks).
186
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 310).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E270480
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 101).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
187
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you rapidly brake
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal. It
can also reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Brakes
E270480
It illuminates when you engage the
parking brake and the ignition is
on.
If it illuminates when your vehicle
is moving, make sure the parking
brake is disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTILOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
•
•
You take corners too fast.
The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure the transmission
is locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could
result in vehicle roll-away, property
damage or bodily injury.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster
will illuminate and remains illuminated until
the parking brake is released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
188
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or
with a trailer, press and hold the brake pedal
down, then set the parking brake. There may
be a little vehicle movement as the parking
brake sets to hold the vehicle's weight. This
is normal and should be no reason for
concern. If needed, press and hold the
service brake pedal down, then try
reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and traction
control light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure you
did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the stability
control and traction control light is still
illuminating steadily, have the system
serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General Information
(page 105).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off or
on.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
Switching the System Off
•
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
•
You can switch the system off by either using
the information display controls or the switch.
189
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Using the Information Display Controls
•
The stability and traction control
light:
Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
E130458
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
Stability Control
•
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this could reduce the operator’s
ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system activates,
SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability control
or the traction control system, you may
experience the following conditions:
190
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
The stability control and traction control
systems do not enhance your vehicle's
ability to maintain traction of the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The stability and traction control light
flashes.
Your vehicle slows down.
Reduced engine power.
A vibration in the brake pedal.
The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the system applies higher
brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
B
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
B
B
A
A
B
A
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 189).
E72903
A
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
B
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
191
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control (page
189).
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See
Principle of Operation (page 64).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device to
prevent false alerts.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
connected to prevent the alert.
192
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 105).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 112).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
193
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment. You
are still responsible to drive with due care
and attention.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
WARNING: Active park assist does
not apply the brakes under any
circumstances.
Note: The blind spot information system
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during an active park assist
maneuver.
Note: Active park assist is a multi-step
process and may require you to shift your
transmission multiple times. Follow the
on-screen instructions until you complete the
parking process.
Parking Aids
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers your
vehicle (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, transmission and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
park your vehicle.
•
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose to
override the system by grabbing the steering
wheel or pushing the active park assist
button.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
fascia, free from now, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the systems accuracy. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects.
The system may not operate correctly in any
of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire significantly
worn more than the other tires.
• One or more tires are improperly inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference. For
example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air
brakes or horns.
•
The edge of the neighboring parking
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow or fog.
Note: Following a change in tire size, the
system must recalibrate and operation may
be impaired for a short time.
194
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer or
other object near the sensors on the front
or rear of your vehicle.
• You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use. For
example, when using a mini-spare tire.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button to turn the system
on or off.
Parking Aids
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left hand side or right
hand side of your vehicle. If the direction
indicator is not used, the system defaults to
the passenger side of your vehicle.
E130107
When the system finds a suitable space it
displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the instructions on
the display screen. If your vehicle is moving
very slowly, you may need to pull forward a
short distance before the system is ready to
park.
Note: You can also activate the system after
you drive partially or completely pass the
parking space. To do so, press the active
park assist button and the system informs
you if you recently passed a suitable parking
space.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
195
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last detected space.
Parking Aids
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the display screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted, for
example driver input is detected, the system
switches off and you need to take full control
of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into reverse
(R), with your hands off the steering wheel
and nothing obstructing its movement, your
vehicle steers itself into the space. The
system displays instructions to move your
vehicle back and forth in the space.
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied
by a touchscreen display message and a
chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a chime
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is finished. You are responsible for
checking the parking job and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
196
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active
park search.
Parking Aids
•
•
Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
Switching off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied by
a tone. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered. For example, with snow, ice or dirt. Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
You may have recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect, the vehicle must be driven on a straight road for
a short period of time.
197
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission. For example, rolling forward when the transmission is in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly. For example, not inflated correctly, improper size or of a different size.
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly. For example, when driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car
wash.
198
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not switch the camera
features on or off when your vehicle is
moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo
door is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines disappear when
the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
E142435
199
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the
intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides
during normal operation and some objects
may not be seen. In some vehicles, the
guidelines disappear when you connect the
trailer tow connector.
A
B C
D
E
E
Fixed guideline: Red zone
F
Rear bumper
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Fixed Guidelines
Active Guidelines (If Equipped)
F
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed
guidelines are on.
E142436
A
Active guideline
B
Centerline
C
Fixed guideline: Green zone
200
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Note: Active guidelines are only shown with
fixed guidelines while your vehicle is in
reverse (R).
D
Parking Aids
D
C
E
B
A
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Manual Zoom
E163914
Manual zoom allows you to get a closer view
of an object behind your vehicle. The
zoomed image keeps the bumper in the
image to provide a reference. The zoom
feature is only active while the transmission
is in reverse (R).
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
Camera System Settings
A
Rear bumper
B
Fixed guideline: Red Zone
C
Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
D
Fixed guideline: Green zone
E
Centerline
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See Settings (page 436).
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot (If
Equipped)
The system provides an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones in the display
screen. The zones highlight green, yellow
and red when the parking aid sensors detect
an object in the coverage area.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
201
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Parking Aids
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
202
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Your vehicle speed could decrease below
the set speed when driving uphill.
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Note: The system cancels if your vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
Setting the Cruise Speed
Drive to the desired speed.
E265306
Press the toggle button upward or
downward to set the current
speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
Changing the Set Speed
WARNING: Do not use cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The system
does not apply the brakes.
To help the system to maintain the set speed
when going downhill, downshift to a lower
gear.
E265306
E265860
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 81).
Switching Cruise Control On
Press the toggle button upward.
E265296
E71340
The indicator appears in the
information display.
203
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Press the toggle button upward or
downward to increase or decrease
the set speed in small increments.
Press and hold up or down to accelerate or
decelerate, respectively. Release the button
when you reach the desired speed.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press the
toggle button either direction.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing only the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Cruise Control
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button, or
tap the brake pedal to cancel the
set speed.
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release to resume the
set speed.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and hold the toggle button
downward when the system is in
E265297
standby mode, or switch the
ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: Always pay close
attention to changing road conditions when
using adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive
cruise control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections or
roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has aftermarket
electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
may not detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect pedestrians or objects in
the road.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
204
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
is not a crash warning or avoidance
system.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select four gap settings.
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Press and release the button.
E265296
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
E164805
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
The system uses a radar sensor that projects
a beam directly in front of your vehicle.
Following a Vehicle
E164805
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
E265306
Press the toggle button upward or
downward to set the current
speed.
E265860
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
205
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: When following a vehicle,
your vehicle does not always decelerate
quickly enough to avoid a crash without
driver intervention. Always apply the
brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
Cruise Control
•
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
only warns of vehicles detected by the
radar sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle
graphic appears in the information display.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small temporary
acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
the lane you are in.
•
Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from
the vehicle in front. The system only applies
limited braking. You can override the system
by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system continues
to brake. A red warning bar displays on the
windshield and you must take immediate
action.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
by pressing the gap control.
E265275
Press the toggle button upward or
downward to set gap distance.
206
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E164805
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and
therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Graphic
display,
bars indicated
between
vehicles
Distance Gap
Dynamic
behavior
1
Closest.
Sport.
2
Close.
Normal.
3
Medium.
Normal.
4
Far.
Comfort.
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator pedal,
it does not automatically apply the brakes
to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
When you override the system, the
green indicator light illuminates
and the vehicle image does not
appear in the information display.
E144529
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button, or
tap the brake pedal to cancel the
set speed.
Note: The set speed is stored.
Changing the Set Speed
E265306
Press the toggle button upward or
downward to increase or decrease
the set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either direction to change
the set speed in large increments. Release
the button when you reach your preferred
speed.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach your preferred speed. Press the
toggle button either direction.
207
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release to resume the
set speed.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). The
information display indicates low engine
speed, an audible alarm sounds and the
automatic braking releases if the vehicle
drops below this speed.
Cruise Control
Automatic cancellation can also occur when:
•
•
•
The tires lose traction.
The engine speed is too low.
You apply the parking brake.
Hilly Condition Usage
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The system
needs additional engine braking in these
situations to reduce the load on the vehicle’s
regular brake system to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for an
extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
E265297
Press and release the button when
the system is in standby mode, or
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
208
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E71621
Cruise Control
Detection issues can occur:
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected
once they have moved fully into
your lane.
B
With motorcyclists that may be
detected late, or not at all.
C
With vehicles in front of you when
going into and coming out of a
bend. The detection beam does
not follow sharp curves in the road.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
In these cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take
action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detection.
E145632
209
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function when something blocks the sensor.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind
a fascia panel.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
block the sensor.
Cruise Control
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar is dirty or obstructed.
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the
display.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. A false blocked condition either self
clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle.
210
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Cruise Control
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control will
not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, and the system does not respond
to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains
active to maintain set speed.
E71340
You can change from adaptive cruise control
to normal cruise control through the
information display.
211
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment. You
are still responsible to drive with due care
and attention.
WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system
to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles may
result in the system warning you even if
you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display informs the driver that
the system is unavailable.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
212
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle, unless it detects
a MyKey™.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
Driving Aids
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display. See General
Information (page 105). When activated, the
system will monitor your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning.
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
System Display
When active the system will run automatically
in the background and only issue a warning
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See
General Information (page 105).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in
a colored bar.
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red. The yellow
position indicates the first warning is active
and the red position indicates the second
warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning, you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the typical
range.
E131358
213
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change to
grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•
•
Switching the ignition off and on.
Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on your
vehicle.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
214
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When aid or alert and aid modes are
selected and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or touch
on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function with a
blocked camera, or a damaged or dirty
windshield.
Driving Aids
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system stores the on or off setting
until you manually change it, unless it
detects a MyKey™. If the system detects a
MyKey, it defaults to on and the mode is set
to alert.
Note: If the system detects a MyKey™,
pressing the button does not affect the on
or off status of the system.
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your lane
is likely to occur, it notifies or assists you to
stay in your lane through the steering system
and information display. Depending on the
feature operation mode you select, the
system provides a warning by vibrating the
steering wheel or a steering assistance by
gently counter steering your vehicle back
into the lane.
E173233
Press the button on the center
console to switch the system on or
off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. See General Information (page
105). The system stores the last-known
selection for each of these settings. You do
not need to readjust your settings each time
you switch the system on.
Mode (if equipped): This setting allows you
to select which of the system features you
can enable.
215
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
Note: Some vehicles only have the alert
function.
Driving Aids
Intensity (if equipped): This setting affects
the intensity of the steering wheel vibration
used for the alert and alert + aid modes. This
setting does not affect the aid mode.
•
•
•
Low.
Normal.
High.
System Display
E165516
Aid only (if equipped) – Provides steering
assistance toward the lane center when the
system detects an unintended lane
departure.
E165517
A
Alert
B
Aid
Alert + Aid (if equipped) – Provides steering
assistance toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane, the system provides a steering wheel
vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
216
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E151660
If you switch the system on in alert mode, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings appears in the information display.
Driving Aids
If you switch the system on in aid or alert and
aid mode, a separate white icon also
appears, or in some vehicles, arrows display
with the lane markings.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
•
•
•
When the system is on, the color of the lane
markings change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side. This may be because:
•
•
Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
The direction indicator is active.
Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field of view.
The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog,
following a large vehicle that is blocking
or shadowing the lane or poor headlamp
illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Quick braking.
Fast acceleration.
Using the turn signal indicator.
Evasive steering maneuver.
Driving too close to the lane marking.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
217
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
218
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING: Never use the Blind Spot
Information System as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. The Blind Spot Information
System is not a replacement for careful
driving.
A
A
E124788
219
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft (3 m)
beyond the bumper. The system is designed
to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Driving Aids
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
System Lights and Messages
System Sensor Blockage
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 3 mph (5 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into
reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot Information
System turns back on when you drive your
vehicle above 3 mph (5 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears except
the reverse (R).
E205199
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
220
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow
in front of the sensors and/or driving in heavy
rain can cause system degradation. Also,
other types of obstructions in front of the
sensor can cause system degradation. This
is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
Driving Aids
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the system alert
indicators will remain ON and the system will
no longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning but
the alert indicators will remain illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two
ways:
• After the blockage in front of the sensors
is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate
decreases or stops, drive for a few
minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to
detect passing vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors may
detect the trailer thus causing a false alert.
It may be desirable to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off if the false alerts
become annoying.
System Errors
Switching the System Off and On
If the system senses a problem with the left
or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and
a message will appear in the information
display. See Information Messages (page
112).
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page 105).
When the Blind Spot Information System
switches off, you will not receive alerts and
the information display shows a system off
message. The telltale in the cluster also
illuminates. When you switch the Blind Spot
Information System on or off, the alert
indicators flash twice.
System Limitations
The system does have its limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor may limit
vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the system:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering
and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a convoy
pass through the blind zone.
221
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The system switches back on every
time you start your vehicle.
You can also have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off
permanently, the system can only be
switched back on at an authorized dealer.
Driving Aids
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING: Never use the Cross
Traffic Alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before backing
out of a parking space. Cross Traffic Alert
is not a replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic
Alert turns off.
E142440
222
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions while
your transmission is in reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
Driving Aids
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
223
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts
The system detects approaching vehicles
from up to 45 ft (14 m) away, though
coverage decreases when the sensors are
blocked. Reversing slowly helps increase the
coverage area and effectiveness.
E205199
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle
is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also
sounds an audible alert and a message
appears in the information display indicating
a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse
sensing system that sounds its own series
of tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 192).
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 219). If the Blind Spot
Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic
Alert is also blocked. A corresponding
message appears in the information display
as soon as you shift the transmission into
reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
224
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles.
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.
• Severe weather conditions.
• Debris build-up near or around the
sensor(s).
• Small distance to the vehicle ahead.
• Adjacently parking vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
Driving Aids
If the rear end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
False Alerts
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors may
detect the trailer thus causing a false alert.
It may be desirable to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off if the false alerts
become annoying.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic Alert
off in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 112). When you
switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will not
receive alerts and the information display
will display a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently, the
system can only be switched back on at an
authorized dealer.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will appear
in the information display. See Information
Messages (page 112).
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault
is detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Obtain immediate service from an
authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
225
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
STEERING
Driving Aids
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (If
Adaptive Learning
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
WARNING: This system is designed
to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT activate the
brakes automatically. Failure to press the
brake pedal to activate the brakes may
result in a collision.
WARNING: The collision warning
system with brake support cannot help
prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
226
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Equipped)
Driving Aids
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver of
certain collision risks. A radar detects if your
vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light illuminates,
the brake support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. This may be apparent to
the driver. The system does not automatically
activate the brakes but, if the brake pedal is
pressed, full force braking is applied even if
the brake pedal is lightly pressed.
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and an
audible warning chime sounds.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings by
using the information display control. See
General Information (page 105).
227
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Blocked Sensors
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING: The collision warning
system’s brake support can only help
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs if the driver applies the vehicle’s
brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like any typical braking situation.
E156131
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though
the manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings. See General
Information (page 105).
E145632
Driving Aids
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the radar
signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this message
being displayed.
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
in the display
that it is no longer obstructed
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
with the radar signals
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve
228
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving Aids
System Limitations
WARNING: The collision warning
system’s brake support can only help
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs if the driver applies the vehicle’s
brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like any typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology, there
may be certain instances where vehicles do
not provide a collision warning. These
include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Severe weather conditions (see blocked
sensor section).
Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor section).
Small distance to vehicle ahead.
Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
DRIVE CONTROL (If Equipped)
Lincoln Drive Control
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
229
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
• Adaptive suspension dynamically adjusts
the shock absorbers stiffness in real time
to match the road surface and driver
inputs. This system continuously monitors
your vehicle’s motion, suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Driving Aids
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the drive control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
drive (D) or sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
You can change your vehicle's Drive Control
settings from the menu on the display
screen. See General Information (page 369).
230
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors gray out the mode selections
within the information display, preventing
you from changing states when the gear
position is changed. Other types of errors
produce a temporary message in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 112). If either condition
persists for multiple key cycles, see an
authorized dealer.
Load Carrying
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE (If
WARNING: Do not place any objects
on the cargo area shade. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of
your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash.
Equipped)
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E210726
E210725
Pull the strap at the front of the cargo area
to open the storage compartment.
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
provided anchors. Do not put more than
50 lb (22 kg) in the net.
LUGGAGE COVERS (If Equipped)
CARGO NETS (If Equipped)
WARNING: This net is not designed
to restrain objects during a collision or
heavy braking.
E142447
WARNING: Make sure that the posts
are properly latched in mounting features.
The cover may cause injury in a sudden
stop or accident if it is not securely
installed.
231
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
Load Carrying
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod into
the retention slots located on the rear
quarter trim panels.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section guides you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both.
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within
its design rating capability, with or
without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before you
load your vehicle, become familiar with
the following terms for determining your
vehicle’s weight rating, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
E198719
232
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Load Carrying
Payload
PAYLOAD
E143816
Payload is the combined weight of cargo
and passengers that your vehicle is
carrying. The maximum payload for your
vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading
label. The label is either on the B-pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and Canada
may not have a tire and loading label.
Look for “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for
maximum payload. The payload listed
on the Tire and Loading Information
label is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If
you install any additional equipment on
your vehicle, you must determine the
new payload. Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire and Loading label. When towing,
trailer tongue weight or king pin weight
is also part of payload.
WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity
(how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight
the vehicle should carry). Once you
233
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
have reached the maximum payload
of your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space available.
Overloading or improperly loading
your vehicle can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
Load Carrying
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight
that a single axle (front or rear) can carry.
These numbers are on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes
all options, equipment, passengers and
cargo. It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the
highest possible weight of a fully loaded
trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer
Towing Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed information.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating)
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification label vehicle
weight limits can adversely affect the
performance and handling of your
vehicle, cause vehicle damage and
can result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
234
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
GCWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the vehicle and the loaded trailer,
including all cargo and passengers, that
the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated for
operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle.
Load Carrying
The gross combined weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original
tires because they may lower your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can adversely
affect the performance and handling
of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage
and can result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury
or death.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
235
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Load Carrying
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
236
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
front or the rear gross axle weight rating
specified for your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utilitytype Vehicles
WARNING: When loading the
roof racks, we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as maintain
a low center of gravity. Loaded
vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit
of your vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
Note: Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays, related
to towing. See Fuses (page 262).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
237
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in the
Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 232).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine torque
to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer begins
to sway, the stability control warning lamp
flashes and a message appears in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 112). Slow your vehicle
down, pull safely to the side of the road and
check for correct load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 231).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Trailer tow is not permitted on all
applications of Livery and Limousine.
238
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) if your vehicle
can tow a class I trailer or 40 ft² (3.72
m²) if your vehicle can tow a class III
trailer.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the
1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point.
Towing
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
use electric trailer brakes.
Powertrain and Trailer Class
Your vehicle may tow a class I or III
trailer provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for your
vehicle configuration on the following
chart.
Maximum GCWR
Maximum Trailer Weight
3.7L TiVCT front-wheel drive, Class I
6,900 lb (3,131 kg)
2,000 lb (907 kg)
3.5L GTDi all-wheel drive, Class I
7,200 lb (3,267 kg)
2,000 lb (907 kg)
3.5L GTDi all-wheel drive, Class III
9,750 lb (4,424 kg)
4,500 lb (2,042 kg)
*
*
For towing trailers up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), use a weight-carrying hitch and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue
loads through your vehicle’s underbody structure.
239
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 479).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 232).
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles
with a Trailer Towing Package and
7–Pin Connector)
Color
E211391
Function
Yellow
Left turn signal and stop lamp
White
Ground (-)
Blue
Electric brakes
Green
Right turn signal and stop lamp
Orange
Battery (+)
Brown
Running lights
Grey
Reverse lights
Hitches
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
240
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
Towing
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is
higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park your vehicle, without the trailer, on
a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to your vehicle without
the weight-distributing bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight distributing bars so that the height
of the front fender is approximately
halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not level,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 3–6.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.
241
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Trailer Brakes
Towing
Trailer Brake Controller Connector (If
Trailer Lamps
When Towing a Trailer
Equipped)
The connector is located under the
instrument panel above the brake pedal.
•
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring;
this may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
•
•
•
•
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
E211392
242
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
Towing
•
•
•
If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in park
(P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
243
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without
access to wheel dollies or vehicle transport
trailer), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the
ground, regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
• Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot shift
the transmission into neutral (N), you may
need to override it. See Transmission
(page 175).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when
being towed.
Towing
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 125).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed
these guidelines to prevent damage to your
transmission.
You can tow your 3.5L or 3.7L equipped
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each day
and every six hours thereafter. With the
engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless start
button until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).
3. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door key
to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 295).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow dolly,
follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
244
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with the
front wheels off the ground (by using a tow
dolly) and the rear wheels on the ground.
This causes damage to your all-wheel drive
system. If you are using a vehicle transport
trailer, follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN
•
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this
time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics.
•
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km). Vary your speed frequently and
change up through the gears early. Do not
labor the engine.
•
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
•
•
•
•
Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back home).
Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
Drive at reasonable speeds.
Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
Use the recommended engine oil.
Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
245
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Driving Hints
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
•
•
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
E259345
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•
•
Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move
freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot slip
out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
E142666
246
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Driving Hints
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and press
down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make
sure they are secure.
247
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
•
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi (110,000 km)
(whichever comes first) for subsequent
owners.
•
Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of
diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m)
of a paved or county maintained road,
no recoveries.
•
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (160 km)
of the disablement location or to the
nearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requests
a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100 mi (160 km) from the
disablement location, the client is
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (160 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle
is operational but the trailer is not, then
the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-521-4140.
248
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (160 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States clients, call
1-800-521-4140. Clients need to submit their
original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company of Canada,
Limited offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is eligible
within Canada or the continental United
States.
If you require more information, please call
us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333, or visit our
website at www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when the
ignition is in any position, or if the key is not
in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery loses charge. As a result,
there may be insufficient power to restart
your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your hazard
flashers when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
•
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside
coverage and benefits may differ from the
U.S. coverage.
•
Press the flasher control and all front and
rear direction indicators flash.
Press the button again to switch them off.
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel
to the engine in the event of a moderate to
severe crash. Not every impact causes a
shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
249
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
FUEL SHUTOFF
Roadside Emergencies
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP
to switch on your vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by
pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
250
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not attach the cables
to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the
intake manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
WARNING: Do not attach the end of
the positive cable to the studs or L-shaped
eyelet located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Do not connect the end
of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases
that surround the battery.
4
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
2
Jump Starting
1
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
251
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
2
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
1
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
3
E142665
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
252
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
Your vehicle runs out of power.
Sounding of the horn is only enabled in
specific markets.
Roadside Emergencies
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Lincoln
Motor Company does not approve a slingbelt
towing procedure. If you tow your vehicle
incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle
damage may occur.
Lincoln Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.
E143886
253
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line provides warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made
using Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln Motor Company
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
254
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln Motor Company policies,
please contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
255
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
Customer Assistance
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first
18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
256
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
Customer Assistance
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
257
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel
or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur
fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact our
Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using improper fuels may also result in
difficulty importing your vehicle back into the
United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or
Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean,
and Israel and the Middle East, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact the
corresponding Ford Customer Assistance
Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
258
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
Customer Relationship Center
Phone
Fax
E-mail
Asia Pacific
N/A
N/A
[email protected]
Caribbean and Central America
+1 313 594 4857
-
[email protected]
971 4 3327 266
[email protected]
Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
Middle East
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users
in Saudi
800850078
North Africa
N/A
N/A
[email protected]
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands
+1-800-841-3673
N/A
[email protected]
Sub-Saharan Africa
+1-313-594-4857
N/A
[email protected]
South Korea
+82-02-1600-6003
N/A
[email protected] or
[email protected]
259
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Customer Assistance
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Global
Trade Services by emailing,
[email protected].
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
E142557
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
260
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-automobiles.html (French)
Phone
1–800–333–0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website
www.ford.ca
Phone
1–800–565-3673
261
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect the vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the cover
to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
98
77
97
96
76
75
95
94
93 92 91 90 89
72 71 70 69 68 67
73
53
52
38
37
36
65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
66
51 50 49 48 47 46 45
35
34
33
32
13
12
11
10
25
15
87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78
88
74
54
14
44
31
43
42
41
40
39
30
29
28
27
26
55
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E173618
262
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you will need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 295).
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
1
Fan relay 2.
1
Fan relay 1.
1
Trailer brake control module.
40A
40A
30A
Wipers.
Washer pump.
1
30A
1
Anti-lock brake system pump.
1
B+ #1 access circuit (limousine/livery).
1
Power liftgate.
50A
50A
30A
Moonroof.
Power sunshade.
1
20A
Second row console power point.
1
20A
10
Relay
Third row power seats relay.
11
Relay
Heated rear window relay.
12
Relay
Trailer tow battery charge relay.
263
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
13
Relay
Starter motor relay.
14
Relay
Cooling fan number 2 relay.
15
Relay
Fuel pump relay.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Protected Components
1
B+ #2 access circuit (limousine/livery).
1
110V AC power point.
1
Front blower motor relay.
1
Starter relay.
1
Storage bin power point.
1
Instrument panel power point / cigar lighter.
1
Third row seat module.
1
Memory module.
1
Trailer tow battery charge (non-limousine/livery).
1
Vacuum pump relay (limousine only).
40A
30A
40A
30A
20A
20A
30A
30A
30A
40A
264
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
25
-
26
27
28
29
30
31
Protected Components
Not used.
Rear window defroster.
Heated mirrors.
1
40A
1
Cargo power point.
1
Front climate controlled seats.
1
Rear climate controlled seats.
1
Rear heated seats.
1
Electric fan relay 3.
20A
30A
30A
20A
25A
32
Relay
Auxiliary blower motor relay.
33
Relay
Cooling fan #1 relay.
34
Relay
Front blower motor relay.
35
Relay
Cooling fan (series) relay.
36
-
37
Relay
Trailer tow right-hand stop/turn lamps relay.
38
Relay
Trailer tow reverse lamps relay.
Not used.
265
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
1
Auxiliary blower motor.
1
Left front smart window motor.
1
Left rear smart window motor.
1
Passenger power seat.
1
Anti-lock brake system valves.
30A
30A
30A
30A
20A
Relay
Windshield washer relay.
2
Rain sensor.
2
Canister vent solenoid (3.5L engine).
5A
5A
2
Washer pump.
2
Front park lamps.
15A
10A
-
Not used.
Heated mirrors.
2
10A
266
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
51
Fuse Rating
Powertrain control module — Injector power monitor
(3.7L engine).
2
5A
52
-
53
Relay
54
-
55
Relay
56
2
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Protected Components
Not used.
Trailer tow left-hand stop/turn lamps relay.
Not used.
Wiper relay.
Fuel injectors.
Fuel pump relay.
30A
2
Left-hand high intensity discharge headlamp.
2
Alternator sensor.
2
Brake on/off switch.
2
Trailer tow back-up lamps.
2
B+ #6 access circuit (limousine/livery).
2
A/C clutch relay.
2
Trailer tow stop/turn lamps.
20A
10A
10A
10A
20A
10A
15A
267
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
2
Rear wipers.
2
B+ #7 access circuit (limousine/livery).
15A
20A
Relay
Powertrain control module – vehicle power relay.
Vehicle power #2 – oxygen sensor heater.
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.
2
20A
2
Vehicle power #4 (ignition coils).
2
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control module).
20A
20A
Vehicle power #3 (coil) – A/C clutch relay.
Fan control relay coils 1-3.
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.
2
15A
-
Not used.
268
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
72
73
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
2
Limousine/livery run/accessory.
2
Limousine/livery battery saver.
5A
5A
74
-
Not used.
75
-
Not used.
76
-
Not used.
77
Relay
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
Trailer tow park lamps relay.
2
Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.
2
Adaptive cruise control module.
2
B+ #3 access circuit (limousine/livery).
2
B+ #4 access circuit (limousine/livery).
2
Rear washer.
20A
10A
30A
15A
15A
-
Not used.
Trailer tow park lamps.
2
20A
269
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
B+ #5 access circuit (limousine/livery).
2
15A
Powertrain control module.
Keep alive power and relay.
Powertrain control module relay.
Canister vent solenoid (3.7L engine).
2
5A
Run start relay.
2
5A
Relay
Run start relay.
Anti–lock brake system module.
Adaptive headlamps module.
2
10A
2
Powertrain control module run/start.
2
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A
10A
Front blower relay coil.
Power steering module.
2
5A
Auxiliary blower motor.
Rear window defroster relay.
Battery charge / vacuum pump relays.
2
5A
Body control module run/start.
2
30A
270
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
1J
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
95
-
Not used.
96
-
Not used.
97
-
Not used.
98
Relay
A/C clutch relay.
Case Low Profile fuse.
fuse.
2 Mini
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel. You may
need to remove a trim panel to access it.
271
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
E163102
272
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
1
30A
Passenger side rear window.
2
15A
Memory seat.
Second row seats.
3
30A
Passenger side front window.
4
10A
Demand lamps battery saver relay.
Limousine battery saver.
5
20A
Audio amplifier
Active noise control module.
6
5A
7
7.5A
Driver seat module logic.
Left front door zone module.
Keypad.
8
10A
Power liftgate.
9
10A
SYNC module.
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
10
10A
Run accessory relay.
Rear climate control.
Rear seat entertainment module (livery only).
USB power outlet.
273
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
Front wiper motor relay.
Limousine run/accessory.
11
10A
Intelligent access module logic.
Heads-up display.
12
15A
Puddle lamp.
Backlighting LED.
Interior lighting.
13
15A
Right-hand direction indicators.
14
15A
Left-hand direction indicators.
15
15A
Center high mounted stop lamp.
Backup lamp.
16
10A
Right low beam headlamp.
17
10A
Left low beam headlamp.
18
10A
Third row power seats.
Start button.
Keypad illumination.
Brake-shift interlock.
Powertrain control module wake-up.
19
20A
Smart amplifier.
Subwoofer amplifier.
274
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
20
20A
Not used (spare).
21
10A
Extended power module.
22
20A
Horn relay.
23
15A
Steering wheel control module logic.
Instrument cluster.
24
15A
Steering wheel control module.
Datalink.
25
15A
Not used (spare).
26
5A
Push button ignition switch.
27
20A
Intelligent access module power.
28
15A
Not used (spare).
29
20A
Radio.
30
15A
Front park lamps.
Trailer tow relay for park lamps.
Front side markers.
31
5A
Trailer tow brake controller.
32
15A
Smart window motors.
Master window and mirror switch.
275
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
Lock switch illumination.
Moonroof.
110V AC power point.
Rear seat switch (livery).
33
10A
Suspension module.
34
10A
Reverse park aid module.
Automatic high beam and lane departure module.
Rear heated seat module.
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Interior mirror.
35
5A
Climate control humidity sensor.
Overdrive cancel switch (limousine/livery).
Heads-up display.
36
10A
Heated steering wheel.
37
10A
Refrigerator.
38
10A
Not used (spare).
39
15A
High beams.
40
10A
Rear park lamps.
License plate lamps.
276
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse or Relay Number
Fuse Rating
Protected Components
Rear light bar applique.
41
7.5A
Extended power module.
42
5A
Not used (spare).
43
10A
Not used (spare).
44
10A
Not used (spare).
45
5A
Not used (spare).
46
10A
Climate control module.
47
15A
Fog lamp relay.
48
30A Circuit breaker
49
Relay
Delayed accessory relay.
Body control module.
277
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Not used (spare).
Fuses
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher
amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
E217331
278
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout
Fuse Type
A
Micro 2
B
Micro 3
C
Maxi
279
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Fuses
Callout
Fuse Type
D
Mini
E
M Case
F
J Case
G
J Case Low Profile
280
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•
•
•
•
Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
281
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
Maintenance
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
4
E202009
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
Closing the Hood
E235972
1
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left-hand
side.
E235971
282
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8–12 in
(20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L
E173375
283
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Maintenance
A.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 288).
D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 294).
G.
Air filter assembly. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 301).
B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 286).
E.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 295).
H.
C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil
Dipstick (page 286).
F.
Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 262).
Automatic transmission dipstick.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 292).
I.
Washer fluid reservoir. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 295).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L
284
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Maintenance
A
E173333
B
C
D
I
H
E
G
A.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 288).
D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 294).
B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 286).
E.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 295).
C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil
Dipstick (page 286).
F.
Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 262).
285
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
F
G.
Air filter assembly. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 301).
Maintenance
H.
I.
Automatic transmission dipstick.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 292).
Washer fluid reservoir. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 295).
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
A
MIN
B
MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
Checking the engine oil level too soon
after you switch the engine off may result
in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 282).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood
Overview (page 284).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again
to check the oil level. See Under Hood
Overview (page 284).
286
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If the
oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil
immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 355).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Maintenance
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 284). Turn
it counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 355). You may have
to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
287
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
From the main menu scroll to:
Message
Action and description
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Hold OK to Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
Reset
displays the following
message.
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
Maintenance
Message
Action and description
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at the
intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 479).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
288
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F (-37°C).
Coolant concentration should be checked
using a refractometer. We do not recommend
the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips
for measuring coolant concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
Maintenance
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable.
It is very important to use prediluted coolant
approved to the correct specification in order
to avoid plugging the small passageways in
the engine cooling system. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 343). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or
cooling system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 343).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. Operating an
engine with a low level of coolant can result
in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to the
correct specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 343).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach
the correct level.
289
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
Maintenance
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Recycled Coolant
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Note: Dispose of used coolant in the
appropriate manner.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
coolant.
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process is
not yet available.
Follow your community's regulations and
standards for recycling and disposing of
automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection.
Coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the coolant and may
cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the
scheduled maintenance information, the
coolant should be changed. Add prediluted
coolant approved to the correct specification.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
343).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient temperature,
vehicle load and terrain.
290
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the coolant
and may cause engine damage.
Maintenance
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and a
message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates,
however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with
a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
291
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Your vehicle has limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle does not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine may
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend that
you contact your roadside assistance
service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short
period of time for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Maintenance
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the coolant temperature
reduces.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power in order
to manage the engine coolant temperature.
Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on vehicle loading, grade and
ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is
no need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long or
steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
The air conditioning may automatically turn
on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant temperature
decreases to the normal operating
temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully
into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine soon
messages appear in your information display,
do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift
into park (P) or neutral (N).
292
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after several
minutes, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the
engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives because they are unnecessary and
could lead to transmission damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Maintenance
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level
WARNING: The dipstick and
surrounding components are hot. Use
gloves when moving components and
checking the transmission fluid level.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
Only check the transmission fluid level when
the engine is at normal operating
temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temperature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
A
B
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid
cap in a counterclockwise direction. See
Under Hood Overview (page 283).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
cap and dipstick and remove it again to
check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks. If the fluid
level is at the MIN mark, add fluid
immediately. See Adding Transmission
Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission fluid
cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
E190273
A
Minimum.
B
Maximum.
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark area
(between points A and B) do not add any
fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum range
(above point B) fluid may need to be
removed. High fluid levels may be caused
by a overheating condition. If you have
operated your vehicle at high speeds, towing
a trailer or in city traffic during hot weather,
allow your vehicle to cool for a minimum of
30 minutes before rechecking the level.
Note: An overfill condition can damage the
transmission.
Adding Transmission Fluid
If the fluid level is within the minimum range
(below point A) add the correct specification
fluid to be within the hash mark area. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 349).
293
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: If the fluid level is below the minimum
range do not drive your vehicle. A low fluid
level can damage the transmission.
*
1. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid
cap in a counterclockwise direction.
Maintenance
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 349). Pour the fluid
directly into the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove
it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission fluid
cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance.
*
2. Remove the air filter assembly securing
bolts.
3. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
4. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly in a
counterclockwise direction.
5. Check the transmission fluid level.
6. Install the air filter assembly in reverse
order. Tighten the air filter assembly
securing bolts until you feel a strong
resistance.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Vehicles With Turbocharged Engines
WARNING: Do not start the engine
with the air filter removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty and can result in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other
than the recommended brake fluid as this
will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
1. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
294
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: A fluid level between the
MAX and MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to
add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
343).
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 343).
295
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Maintenance
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: For vehicles with
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement is
different. You must replace the battery with
one of exactly the same specification.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is
swallowed, call a physician immediately.
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If your vehicle has a battery cover,
after cleaning or replacing the battery, make
sure you reinstall it.
Note: See an authorized dealer for battery
access, testing, or replacement.
296
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are maintained
by power from the battery. Some engine
computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy, optimize the driveability and
performance of the engine. The clock and
radio station presets are also maintained in
memory by power from the low-voltage
battery. These settings are erased when a
technician disconnects and connects the
low-voltage battery.
To restore the settings, do the following:
Maintenance
Note: Until you switch the ignition to the on
position, you will receive a message in your
information display stating that your vehicle
is not in park.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply the parking brake.
Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Switch off all accessories.
Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio Unit (page
366). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Power
Windows (page 94). Reset the radio
station presets. See Audio Unit (page
366).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: Certain features may not operate if
the battery monitor system is not reset with
a scan tool following a jump start or battery
replacement. Normal electrical accessory
operation should resume after your vehicle
is left undisturbed for 8 hours.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the battery
cables to maintain battery charge for quick
starting.
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
297
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Maintenance
Front Wiper Blades
Rear Window Wiper Blade
1
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The assembly plant properly aims the
headlamps on your vehicle. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, have the alignment
of your headlamps checked by your
authorized dealer.
1
E129990
2
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
E183236
1. Lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
298
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E142592
A
8 feet (2.4 meters)
B
Center height of lamp to ground
Maintenance
C
25 feet (7.6 meters)
D
Horizontal reference line
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb
center from the ground and mark an 8 ft
(2.4 m) horizontal reference line on the
vertical wall or screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
light the wall or screen and open the
hood.
E142465
E171165
4. On the wall or screen, you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light located
at the top of the right hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, you will need to adjust the
headlamp.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp.
6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is non-adjustable.
299
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Maintenance
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp assembly,
you must first remove the front fascia and
front bumper assemblies. We recommend
you see an authorized dealer.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
Front Fog Lamp
CHANGING A BULB
2. Use suitable tools, for example a
screwdriver and a socket wrench to
remove the four screws from the wheel
arch liner.
3. You can now carefully reposition the
wheel arch liner to allow access to the
front fog lamp bulb and electrical
connector.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: Switch the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to do so could result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.
Let the bulb cool down before removing
it. Failure to do so could result in personal
injury.
E174588
Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb
Specification Chart (page 362).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
E220461
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
300
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Maintenance
Front Direction Indicator Lamp
License Plate Lamp
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
If a front direction indicator lamp fails, see
an authorized dealer.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Side direction indicators.
• Approach lamp.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Rear side marker lamps.
• Reversing lamps.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front parking lamps.
3
2
E220617
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter the
air induction system. Engine components are
susceptible to damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
479).
1
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws that secure the lens
to the lamp housing.
3. Remove the lamp lens.
301
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
Incorrect component use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 345).
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
Maintenance
3. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful
not to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if it is
not properly seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
E200522
1. Remove the clips that secure the air filter
housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
302
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P3-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-A
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
ESR-M14P5-A
303
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
•
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
•
•
•
Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
•
•
Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
304
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they
are dry.
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Under Hood
•
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
For removing black rubber marks from under
the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel
and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
•
•
Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent cosmetic
damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
•
•
•
•
Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle
pattern.
Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's
surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
•
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle
using water. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
305
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WAXING
•
•
Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Vehicle Care
•
•
•
Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
306
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
309).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft® Spot
and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately, but do not oversaturate or
the ring will set.
307
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
Vehicle Care
Type of Stain
Cleaning Procedure
Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.
cream or mustard.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Dye transfer and all other stains.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.
308
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
•
•
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
309).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
•
•
Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
309
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
Vehicle Care
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use an
approved wheel cleaner if available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
310
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you use
an approved bug and tar remover if
available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This reduces
the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake
pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
Vehicle Care
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
•
•
•
Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
Engine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
311
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
•
Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
•
Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
Vehicle Care
Cooling system
Miscellaneous
•
•
•
Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
•
•
Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Battery
Removing Vehicle From Storage
•
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
•
Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•
Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
•
Maintain recommended air pressure.
312
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of your
vehicle and the ground is less than that of
other models. Drive with extreme care to
avoid damage to your vehicle.
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your vehicle.
If you change the diameter of the tires from
that fitted at the factory, the speedometer
may not display the correct speed. Take your
vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer to have
the system reprogrammed. If you intend to
change the size of the wheels from that fitted
by the manufacturer, you can check the
suitability with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 315).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can also
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door latch post; next to the
driver’s seating position.
Ford strongly recommends maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the way
your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least once
per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination, if equipped.
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
313
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
Wheels and Tires
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
E145299
314
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
•
•
•
Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often have a higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E168583
E142542
315
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak
traction characteristics.
316
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
Wheels and Tires
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
317
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
C D
E
B
F
G
H
A
I
J
M
L
K
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
318
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Wheels and Tires
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
319
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Letter rating
Speed rating
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st
week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers
Wheels and Tires
go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers
if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
320
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
Wheels and Tires
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
B
C
A
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
D
E142544
B
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
321
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual, defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single, defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
Wheels and Tires
B
C
D
A
E
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:
322
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Recommended Tire Pressures and
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check the pressure
of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the
most common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire cracking,
tread separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation
increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
Wheels and Tires
and internal damage to the tire. It also
may result in unnecessary tire stress,
irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the recommended
cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation
or over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
You will find a Tire Label containing the
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure by the tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is also found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch on the B-pillar, or on the edge
of the driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect
the way your vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
323
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
Wheels and Tires
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear on
the tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected, have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
WARNING: Tires degrade over
time depending on many factors such
as weather, storage conditions, and
conditions of use (load, speed, inflation
pressure) the tires experience
throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
324
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Wheels and Tires
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement
tires and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as those
originally provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size may
be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver's door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall of
the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If
the beads do not seat at the maximum
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and
try again.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure,
a Ford dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
325
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Always inflate steel
carcass tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from
the wheel and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating the
tire for mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire sidewall,
the following precautions must be
taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
•
Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
• Use both eye and ear protection.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
Wheels and Tires
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
Highway Hazards
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck
in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can
tear the tire and cause an explosion.
A tire can explode in as little as three
to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a passenger
or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
326
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
No matter how carefully you drive, there
is always the possibility that you may
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment
Tire Rotation
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment.
Have an authorized dealer check the
wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment of all
four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear,
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly, it is intended for temporary
use only and should not be used in a
tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
327
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes irregular
tire wear can be corrected by rotating
the tires. See Wheels and Tires (page
313).
E142547
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index, and speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury, and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended
tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case, or power
transfer unit failure. It is also strongly
advised to follow the Ford recommended
tire inflation pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position),
or Tire Label which is located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect
the way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
•
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need to
use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications)
be used, as cables may chip aluminum
wheels.
•
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S snow chains, snow
cables or equivalent on the front axle for
P235/55R19 equipped vehicles. The use
of snow chains, snow cables or other
traction assist devices that are larger than
SAE Class S may cause damage to your
vehicle’s wheel house, suspension or
body.
•
328
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
•
Do not install tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices on the rear tires.
This could cause damage to the vehicle’s
wheel house or body.
Do not use tire chains, cables or optional
traction devices with optional 255/45R20
tires.
Install cable chains securely, verifying
that the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with
tire cables on your vehicle.
Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the cables. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
Remove the tire cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use tire cables on
dry roads.
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
329
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
Wheels and Tires
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
330
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
Wheels and Tires
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
331
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Low tire pressure warning light
Possible cause
Customer action required
Solid warning light
Tire(s) under-inflated
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Spare tire in use
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Spare tire in use
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Flashing warning light
332
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or
more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the
vehicle to the nearest location where air can
be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) from a
cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature
significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease
about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C)
in ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
WARNING: Do not use tire sealants
as they may damage the tire pressure
monitoring system.
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it may
not function.
333
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
optional 5th road wheel and tire assembly,
the storage location in the luggage
compartment is for temporary use only. The
optional full size road wheel and tire
assembly should be stored outside the
vehicle after delivery.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Wheels and Tires
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 329).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
•
•
•
•
•
Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
Tow a trailer.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
334
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
Use commercial car washing equipment.
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
Wheels and Tires
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front
wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park (P),
set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed. For example,
when changing the front left wheel, place
an appropriate block or wheel chock on
the right rear wheel.
WARNING: No person should place
any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
335
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WARNING: Do not attempt to change
a tire on the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle came equipped with an
extra full size wheel and tire assembly
(placed in the cargo area), be sure to store
the wheel and tire assembly outside of the
vehicle after delivery (livery vehicles only).
Wheels and Tires
Non-Limousine
5. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
6. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket by
turning it counterclockwise. Then remove
the jack kit from the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack, L-shaped bolt, and the
wrench from the felt bag. Fold down the
wrench socket to use to loosen the lug
nuts and to operate the jack.
8. Remove the wheel cover with the lug
wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug
nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but
do not remove them until the wheel is
raised off the ground.
Note: If the third row seat is stowed in the
floor, you will need to unstow it to access
the spare tire.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
E211099
4. Remove the carpeted floor panel located
in the rear of the vehicle, then remove
the wing nut that secures the spare tire
by turning it counterclockwise.
336
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E145908
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
Wheels and Tires
1
4
3
E201156
10.
11.
12.
13.
Put the jack in the jack notch next to
the tire you are changing. Turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is
completely off the ground.
Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
2
5
E75442
14.
15.
Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 340).
Install the wheel cover.
Limousine
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
337
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
Wheels and Tires
8. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E211468
6. Remove the lug wrench (A) and jack (B)
from the jack foam pockets.
7. Remove the wheel cover with the lug
wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug
nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but
do not remove them until the wheel is
raised off the ground.
E211467
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
E145908
338
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E201156
9. Put the jack in the jack notch next to the
tire you are changing. Turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is
completely off the ground.
10. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
Wheels and Tires
12.
Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
Stowing the flat tire
Stowing the jack
1
4
3
E211100
E194296
5
2
E75442
13.
14.
Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 340).
Install the wheel cover.
If you are stowing the flat tire, remove the
L-shaped bolt from the external pocket of
the felt bag. With the third row seat in the
raised position, stand the flat tire in the rear
of the vehicle with the tire’s valve stem facing
the rear of the vehicle. Fasten the flat tire to
the vehicle by inserting the L-shaped bolt
through one of the lug bolt holes in the
wheel. Turn it clockwise into the threaded
hole in the vehicle until the tire is secured.
If you are stowing the temporary spare tire,
place the tire over the jack and secure it with
the large wing nut.
339
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the lug
wrench socket into the handle and place
the jack and wrench into the felt bag as
shown. Place the extension bolt or
L-shaped bolt into the external pocket of
the felt bag. Position the jack as shown
to make sure that the locating holes in
the jack base can be placed on the
locating tabs of the jack mounting
bracket in the spare tire tub.
2. Securely close the wrench compartment
and the jack bag using the Velcro™ straps.
3. Place the jack kit on the angled bracket
in the spare tire tub, using the locating
tabs to position the jack correctly.
Wheels and Tires
4. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With the
jack in place, place the looped end of the
retention bracket over the threaded stud
in the trunk floor and secure it with the
plastic wing nut.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
E211101
340
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the
wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach
the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact
at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in
loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Bolt size
lb.ft (Nm) *
1/2 x 20
100 lb.ft (135 Nm)
M14 x 1.5 (Limousine only)
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).
341
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
A
Wheel pilot bore
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
342
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
Engine
3.5L
Cubic inches.
214
Firing order.
1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system.
Coil on plug
Spark plug gap.
0.030 in (0.75 mm) - 0.033 in (0.85 mm)
Compression ratio.
10:1
Drivebelt Routing
E191904
343
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Engine
3.7L
Cubic inches
226
Firing order
1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition system
Coil on plug
Spark plug gap
0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)
Compression ratio
10.5:1
Drivebelt Routing
E191904
344
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L
Component
3.5L
Air filter element.
FA-1884
Oil filter.
FL-500-S
Battery.
BXT-65-750
Spark plugs.
SP-534
Cabin air filter.
FP-68
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2429 (driver side)
WW-2235 (passenger side)
WW-1202 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 479).
345
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
Component
3.7L
Air filter element.
FA-1884
Oil filter.
FL-500-S
Battery.
BXT-65-750
Spark plugs.
SP-520
Cabin air filter.
FP-68
Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2429 (driver side)
WW-2235 (passenger side)
WW-1202 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 479).
346
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142477
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
A
World manufacturer identifier
B
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
C
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D
Engine type
E
Check digit
F
Model year
G
Assembly plant
H
Production sequence number
347
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
Capacities and Specifications
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission code
along with the transmission description.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
Description
Code
Six-speed automatic transmission 6F55
G
Six-speed automatic transmission 6F50
J
348
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service
the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item
Capacity
Engine oil.
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Engine coolant.
13.7 qt (13 L)
Brake fluid.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive).
2.4 pt (1.15)
Automatic transmission fluid (6F50).
10.9 qt (10.3 L)
Automatic transmission fluid (6F55).
11.6 qt (11 L)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive).
1
1
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)
Windshield washer fluid.
Fill as required
Fuel tank.
18.6 gal (70.4 L)
349
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Item
Capacity
A/C refrigerant.
2.45 lb (1.11 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1 Approximate
235 ml (7.95 fl oz)
dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1
Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
350
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M6C65-A2
Rear differential fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-A
Rear differential fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSP-M2C197-A
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-A
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSL-M2C192-A
351
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M14P19-A
A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-19-R
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
WSH-M1C231-B
352
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-
Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet API
SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
353
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP
WSS-M2C953-A1
354
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service
the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
355
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Item
Capacity
Engine oil
6.0 qt (5.7 L)
Engine coolant
13.2 qt (12.5 L)
Brake fluid
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir
Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive)
2.4 pt (1.15)
Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)
10.9 qt (10.3 L)
Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)
11.6 qt (11 L)
1
1
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)
Windshield washer fluid
Fill as required
8.9 fl oz (265 ml)
Fuel tank
18.6 gal (70.4 L)
A/C refrigerant
2.31 lb (1.05 kg)
A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1 Approximate
8.96 fl oz (265 ml)
dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
356
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-B1
Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1
Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2
Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M6C65-A2
Rear axle fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-A
357
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
Rear axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSP-M2C197-A
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-A
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSL-M2C192-A
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-A
Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M14P19-A
358
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Name
Specification
A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-19-R
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
WSH-M1C231-B
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-
Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-
359
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet API
SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
360
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
Name
Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP
WSS-M2C947-B1
E240522
361
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked
with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North
America to make sure they have the proper
lamp performance, light brightness, light
pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs
will not damage the lamp assembly or void
the lamp assembly warranty and will provide
quality bulb illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Lamp
Specification
Power (Watt)
LED
LED
PY24W SV+
24
Front parking lamps.
LED
LED
Headlamp low beam.
Headlamp high beam.
D3S
35
Front fog lamps.
H11
55
Rear side marker lamp.
LED
LED
Reversing lamp.
LED
LED
Brake and rear lamp.
Rear direction indicator.
LED
LED
Front side marker lamps.
1
Front direction indicator.
362
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Lamp
Central high mounted brake lamp.
License plate lamp.
Specification
Power (Watt)
LED
LED
C5WL
5
Specification
Power (Watt)
LED
LED
1600XB
5
211-2XB
10
37
1.3
1 To
replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Lamp
1
Signal indicator mirror light.
1
First row dome/map lamp.
Second row dome/map lamps.
1
Third row cargo lamp.
Visor vanity lamp.
1
To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
363
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530-1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
364
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Audio System
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in the
vehicle’s CD player.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3 and
WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum number
of playable MP3 and WMA files may be
less depending on the structure of the
CD and exact model of radio present.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
365
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted
by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and
all folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
Audio System
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode,
the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen system controls most
of the audio features.
Adjusting the Volume
Press to adjust the volume.
E265304
E265273
Changing Radio Stations
E265272
In radio mode, press and release + or - to
search through the radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, press and release +
or - to find the previous or next available
satellite radio station.
Ejecting the CD
Press and release to eject a CD.
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The system
stops at the first station it finds in that
direction.
In CD mode, press and release to select the
next or previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or backward through
the current track.
In satellite radio mode, press and release to
select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category, such
as jazz, rock or news, press to find the next
or previous station in the category you select.
Rear Seat Audio Controls (If Equipped)
E265032
Inserting a CD
Adjusting the Rear Volume
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
366
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
E265304
Press and release the toggle
button upward or downward to
adjust the rear volume.
Audio System
Displaying the Clock
E265278
Selecting the Audio Modes
E265035
USB PORT
Press and release the button to
display the clock.
Press and release the button to
scroll through available audio
system modes.
Using Seek
Press and release the toggle
button upward or downward to
E265273
select the next or previous stored
radio frequency station, satellite radio
channel or CD track.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices, if supported.
MEDIA HUB
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
367
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Audio System
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The media hub may be on the instrument
panel or center console.
The media hub may contain one or more of
the following inputs:
See USB Port (page 367).
368
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can simply
touch the item or option that you want to
select. The button changes color when you
select it.
369
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
SYNC™ 3
E269856
370
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Menu Item
Action and Description
A
Status Bar
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate
settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages.
B
Home
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view.
C
Clock
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's
GPS location. See Settings (page 436).
D
Outside Temperature
This displays the current outside temperature.
E
Feature Bar
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature.
The touchscreen allows you quick access to
all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment options.
Using the status and feature bar you can
quickly select the feature you want to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature
that allows you to access and control audio
features for 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off (and no doors open).
371
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status bar
depending on market, vehicle options and
current operation. If a feature is not active,
the icon does not display. Certain icons may
move to the left or right depending on what
options are active.
SYNC™ 3
i
E270077
372
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Callout
Item
Description
A
Driver Temperature
This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system.
B
Heated steering wheel
When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon
displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering
wheel.
(If equipped)
C
Passenger Temperature
When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the
driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are
linked, the passenger's temperature does not display.
D
Microphone Mute
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you.
E
Mute
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.
F
Download
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows
more details about the new software.
G
Wi-Fi
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.
H
Wi-Fi in Range
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.
I
Signal Strength
This icon displays the phone signal strength and the roaming signal strength.
J
Text Message
This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone.
K
911 Assist Off
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC.
L
In-Call
This icon displays when a phone call is active.
373
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Messages may also appear in the status bar
to provide you with notifications. You can
select the message to view the associated
feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item
Functions
Audio
Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can
control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs,
and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Climate
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within
the vehicle.
Phone
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook
of your connected device.
Navigation
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get
driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along
your route.
(If equipped)
374
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Feature Bar Item
Apps
Functions
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone
or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped).
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or electric this is also where
your settings and power information is located.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth
and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
You can customize your system with various settings for the touchscreen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact
with your vehicle.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on what
is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of
your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
375
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar indicating
the status of the voice command session.
See Using Voice Recognition (page 386).
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some of
the SYNC 3 features on your information
display.
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3 screen:
SYNC™ 3
Option
Audio
Information
Information for current audio playing.
Select source.
Navigation
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on
cluster level), and ability to cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown.
Phone
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *
Quick dial
All calls
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Missed calls
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll through
the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
376
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
Press OK to confirm your selection.
SYNC™ 3
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling, not true direction (for example, if
the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of
the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Controls on the Steering
Wheel
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and hold
to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
Using Your Bezel Controls
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
•
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or
switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject
an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be
combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK
PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE
ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 80).
377
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power: Switch the audio system on and
off.
VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system.
SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
advance through available media modes.
SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 364).
SYNC™ 3
•
•
DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
Temperature, fan and climate control
buttons: Control the temperature, fan
speed or settings of the climate control
system. See Climate Control (page 125).
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do
it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent
911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting:
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains and
Roadside Emergencies sections of your
owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings (page
436).
378
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
SYNC™ 3
To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the U.S., Canada or in a
territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers
for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone
sustains damage or loses its connection to
SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for
and try to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If
you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts
to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."
911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•
Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of the
fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
379
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
SYNC™ 3
of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not want to
disclose this information, do not switch the
feature on.
•
•
Safety Information
•
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•
Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables out
of the way, so they do not interfere with
the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure
that you review your device's manual
before using it with SYNC 3.
380
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
•
•
•
Screens crowded with information, such
as Points of Interest reviews and ratings,
SiriusXM Travel Link sports information,
or ski condition search areas.
Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts or
recent phone call entries).
See the following table for more specific
examples.
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Cellular Phone
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls.
System Functionality
Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active.
Wi-Fi
Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Text Messages
Viewing received text messages.
Navigation
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•
•
•
Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Maintain account permissions.
381
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
SYNC™ 3
Updating Your System
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
Lincoln Connect with Lincoln Way
(If
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
Equipped)
USB Updates
With a Lincoln Connect-equipped vehicle,
you can use Lincoln Way® to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel level
and approximate mileage. You can also
schedule specific times to remotely start your
vehicle so it’s ready to hit the road as soon
as you are. Lincoln Way® is available through
a free download via the Apple App Store®
or Google Play™. Message and data rates
may apply. Services may be limited by mobile
phone network coverage area.
To use the USB update you need to log into
your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
•
•
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to start
the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
FCC: LHJ-FAN
IC: 2807E-FAN
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
382
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your use
of the system. Navigation updates cannot be
installed in the background, because the files
are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle, remove
anything that is plugged in the USB ports on
the media hub and plug in the USB drive
containing the update. When the USB drive
is plugged in, the installation should begin
immediately. After a successful installation,
the update is available the next time the
vehicle is started.
Please reference the website for any further
actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
SYNC™ 3
To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select:
Menu Item
Settings
download continues where it left off at the
next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon
activation of an update, a banner displays
on the touchscreen indicating the system
update. Select the icon to see more detail.
This icon displays for two ignition cycles.
General
To switch this feature off:
If you would like to switch this feature on
later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
Available Wi- You can then select your WiFi Networks Fi network. You may have
to enter the security code if
the network is secured. The
system confirms when it has
connected to the network.
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature. If
you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 436). You can also perform a
master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting
(page 456).
Automatic
System
Updates
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system prompts
you to set up a Wi-Fi
connection when you
enable this feature.
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your vehicle
off. The updates do not interrupt the normal
use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download
does not complete for any reason, the
Menu Item
Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection for
automatic updates to OFF.
Customer Assistance
The SYNC support team is available to help
you with any questions you are not able to
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-521-4140.
Canada: 1-800-387-9333.
Mexico: 01-800-719-8466.
383
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC
3, the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system. In
addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data
may be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless
you delete them and are generally accessible
only in your vehicle when the cellular phone
or media player is connected.
HOME SCREEN
384
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform a
Master Reset to erase all stored information.
You can find more information about the
Master Reset in General Settings. See
Settings (page 436). System data cannot be
accessed without special equipment and
access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. The
Lincoln Motor Company does not access the
system data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order, or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of The Lincoln Motor
Company.
SYNC™ 3
E224962
Item
A
Tile
Audio
Home screen display
Shows the active media source.
385
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Tile
Home screen display
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass.
B
Phone
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features
also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, text messaging and roaming.
C
Navigation *
This map displays your current location or current route in real time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and
distance to your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information.
* If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays to
access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio and
climate controls. By using voice commands,
you can keep your hands on the wheel and
your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
386
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice button
E142599
on the steering wheel and wait for
the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context and
the description of the command tell you what
to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
SYNC™ 3
Voice Command
Action and Description
Main Menu
Brings you to the main menu.
Go back
Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel
Ends the voice session.
List of Commands
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For
example, you could say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
Next Page
You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of
choices are given.
Previous Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages
of choices are given.
Help
Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen.
Included here are some of the most popular
commands for each SYNC 3 feature.
387
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command
Sirius Channel ___
Description
1
You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16".
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM
1580".
FM ___
FM ___ HD ___
1
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth connected device.
USB
Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device.
Play Genre ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre
to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
388
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command
Description
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___
1 This
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to
browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
Voice command
Set Temperature ___
Description
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F (15.5–29.5°C).
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the system.
389
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command
Pair Phone
Description
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 436).
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Voice command
Description
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call
Jenny at Home".
Dial ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
390
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands:
Voice Command
Description
<0-9>
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you can continue saying the number.
Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.
Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.
Clear
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Voice command
Description
Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___
You can say the number of the message you would like to hear.
Reply to Message
391
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If Equipped)
to set a destination or find a point of interest.
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more than
20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category:
Voice command
Description
Find an Address
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can also search for an address in a specific
state or province.
Find a ___
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you would like to search for such as "Find
restaurants".
Find a POI
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
Find an Intersection
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Find the Nearest <POI Category>
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would like to search for.
Show Previous Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Show Favorites
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.
Drive Home
Allows you to route to your home address.
Drive to Work
Allows you to route to your work address.
392
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
Voice command
Description
Cancel Route
Cancels the current route.
Detour
Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction
Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route
Displays the active route.
Route Summary
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.
Where Am I
Provides current location.
Zoom in
Allows you to zoom in on the map.
Zoom out
Allows you to zoom out from the map.
393
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command
Description
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device.
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3:
Voice command
Say the name of an app
Description
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an app, followed SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
by help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be
available in all markets. Activation and a
subscription are required.
394
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Voice command
Description
Show Traffic
Displays a list of traffic incidents.
Show Weather Map
Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices
Displays a list of fuel prices.
Show 5 Day Forecast
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice command
Description
Voice Settings
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.
Interaction Mode Standard
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Interaction Mode Advanced
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Call Confirmation On
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
395
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command
Description
Call Confirmation Off
The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On
The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off
The system does not display the list of commands.
You can use the volume control to adjust the
volume of the system voice prompts. While
prompt is active, adjust the volume control
up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or turn
the fan knob) to increase or decrease the
fan speed to the setting you prefer.
ENTERTAINMENT
396
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
SYNC™ 3
E242502
397
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Message
Message and Description
A
Sources
B
Direct Tune
C
Presets
Note: Your vehicle may allow you to save
presets from different audio sources on the
same page.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu Item
AM
FM
SIRIUS
1
CD
1
USB
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.
398
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Sources
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Bluetooth Stereo
Apps
1 This
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections.
feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
Once you have entered the station's call
numbers, you can select:
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on the
radio bezel to select a station.
Menu Item
Enter
To tune a station using the touchscreen,
select:
Menu Item
Cancel
Action and Description
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Press to exit without
changing the station.
There are two preset banks available for AM
and three banks for FM. To access additional
presets, tap the preset button. The indicator
on the preset button shows which bank of
presets you are currently viewing.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
Direct Tune
Presets
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only enter
a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
To set a new preset, tune to the station and
then press and hold one of the memory
preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while
the system saves the station and then
returns.
399
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E234451
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news,
weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM
satellite radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term that begins on
the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See
an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of SiriusXM
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. We are not responsible for any such
programming changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Browse
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.
Direct Tune
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter
The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel
You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number.
400
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Replay
Action and Description
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as
you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Live
ALERT
When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different
preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you
to the live broadcast.
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on
any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 436).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then press
and hold one of the memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the preset
button shows which bank of presets you are
currently viewing.
401
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 436).
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Antenna obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Terrain
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a
weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.
Troubleshooting Tips
Message
Cause
Action
Acquiring Signal
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce No action required. This message should disapaudio for the selected channel.
pear shortly.
Satellite antenna fault
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for service.
The channel is no longer available.
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.
SIRIUS system failure
Invalid Channel
402
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting Tips
Message
Cause
Action
Unsubscribed Channel
Your subscription does not include this channel.
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Satellite acquiring signal…
The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or
SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna.
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
Updating…
Update of channel programming in progress.
No action required. The process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474
Your satellite service is no longer available.
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
None found. Check channel guide.
All the channels in the selected category are either Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked.
function on that station.
SIRIUS Subscription updated
SiriusXM has updated the channels available for
your vehicle.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 436).
403
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
No action required.
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit:
Website
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
404
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature for
stations that have more than 1 HD multicast
(For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and
Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this
button allows you to cycle through all of the
HD stations on that specific frequency. For
example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1,
HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly
causes the radio to cycle through the HD
stations in a cyclic increasing order.
SYNC™ 3
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message
Action and Description
Presets
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes
before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station
may mute due to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital
broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the
station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts
to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when
the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or
digital back to analog sound.
405
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
Issues
Cause
Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. This is poor time alignment by the radio broadIncrease or decrease in audio
caster.
volume.
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.
Sound fading or blending in and out. The radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
No action required. The reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait
Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the until the audio is available.
audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast The previously stored multicast preset or direct No action required. The station is not available in
channel when recalling a preset or tune is not available in your current reception area. your current location.
from a direct tune.
1
Text information does not match
currently playing audio.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
There is no text information shown
for currently selected frequency.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
You can find the form here:
406
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
1
Fill out the station issue form.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
SYNC™ 3
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of DTS. The vehicle manufacturer and DTS
are not responsible for the content sent using
HD Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
Button
Function
Browse
You can use the browse button to select a track.
Repeat
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number
one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order.
407
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
Button
Function
Repeat
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not
highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number
one).
Shuffle
Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the currently
playing track, press the cover art or Info
button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide
30-second skip buttons when you listen to
audio books or podcasts. These buttons
allow you to skip forward or backward within
a track.
408
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
SYNC™ 3
Button
Function
Browse
If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist.
New Search
This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all
tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump
This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the
category you are browsing.
Explore Device
If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your
USB device.
409
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB Ports
Apps
The system supports the use of certain audio
apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or
Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 433).
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the instrument
panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB media
devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb
drives, and charge devices if they support
this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
The system is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod, iPhone,
and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000
songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the touchscreen
to access your climate control features.
Depending on your vehicle line and option
package, your climate screen may look
different from one of the screens shown
below. Your screen may not contain all of
the features shown.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 436).
410
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
SYNC™ 3
E208805
411
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
A
Driver temperature: Touch up or
down to adjust the temperature.
B
Heated steering wheel: Touch the
heated steering wheel icon to
switch the heated steering wheel
on and off (if equipped).
C
Defrost: A pop up appears on the
screen to display the defrost
options.
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to
maximize defrosting. Outside air
flows through the windshield vents,
the fan automatically adjusts to the
highest speed and the temperature
dial returns to the full heat position.
You can use this setting to defog
or clear a thin covering of ice from
the windshield. The heated rear
window also automatically turns on
when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Touch to clear the
windshield of fog and thin ice.
Touch again to return to the
previous airflow selection. When
on, defrost provides outside air to
reduce window fogging and
distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and
demister vents.
Note: To prevent window fogging,
you cannot select recirculated air
when Defrost is on.
Heated rear window: Turns the
heated rear window on and off.
See the Heated Windows and
Mirrors chapter in your owner
manual.
412
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
D
AUTO: Touch the button to switch
on automatic operation. Select the
desired temperature using the
temperature control. The system
adjusts fan speed, air distribution,
air conditioning operation, and
selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in
order to maintain the desired
temperature.
E
Power: Touch the button to switch
the system on and off. Switching
off the climate control system
prevents outside air from entering
the vehicle.
F
DUAL: This button lights up when
the passenger controls are active.
To switch the dual zone operation
off and link the passenger
temperature to the driver
temperature, touch the DUAL
button to switch it off.
G
Passenger temperature: Touch up
or down to adjust the temperature.
SYNC™ 3
H
Touch Rear Control to allow the
rear seat passengers to adjust the
rear climate settings. Touch it
again to prevent the rear seat
passengers from adjusting the
settings. Rear Control
automatically turns off when you
use the touchscreen to adjust the
rear climate settings.
Passenger heated and climate
controlled seats:
Touch the heated seat icon to
adjust the heated seat off and on
(if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat
icon to adjust the
climate-controlled seat off and on
(if equipped).
I
Fan speed: Touch up or down to
increase or decrease the volume
of air circulated in your vehicle.
If your vehicle has automatic
climate controls, select Auto to
connect the rear climate settings
to the Auto settings of the driver.
J
Rear: A pop up appears on the
screen to display the rear control
options.
Touch the up and down arrows to
adjust the temperature.
Touch the power icon to switch the
rear climate control functions off
and on.
K
Manual airflow distribution
controls: Select these controls
individually or together to direct
the air flow to the desired area.
Panel: Distributes air through the
instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the
demister vents, floor vents and rear
seat floor vents.
413
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
L
A/C: A pop-up appears on the
screen to display the air
conditioning options.
MAX A/C: Touch to cool your
vehicle with recirculated air. Touch
again for normal A/C operation.
MAX A/C distributes air through
instrument panel vents and may
help reduce odors from entering
your vehicle. MAX A/C is more
economical and efficient than
normal A/C mode.
A/C: Touch to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency. A/C engages
automatically in MAX A/C, defrost
and footwell/defrost.
Recirculated air: Touch to switch
the recirculated air on or off which
may reduce the amount of time
needed to cool down the interior
and help reduce odors from
reaching the interior. Recirculated
SYNC™ 3
air also engages automatically
when you select MAX A/C. You can
engage this manually in any airflow
mode except defrost. It may also
turn off in all airflow modes except
MAX A/C to reduce fog potential.
M
Driver heated and climate
controlled seats:
Touch the heated seat icon to
adjust the heated seat off and on
(if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat
icon to adjust the
climate-controlled seat off and on
(if equipped).
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of the system. Once you pair your cell phone,
you can access many options using the
touchscreen or voice commands. While the
system supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
414
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
SYNC™ 3
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
415
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
•
Call waiting notification.
Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
SYNC™ 3
G
E251249
Item
A
Menu Item
Recent Call List
Action and Description
Displays your recent calls.
416
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Menu Item
Action and Description
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You
can choose:
All
B
Contacts
Incoming
Outgoing
Missed
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.
A-Z Jump
Selecting this button allows you to choose a
specific letter to view.
C
Phone Settings
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts.
D
Change Device
Gives you access to the list of paired or connected Bluetooth devices allowing you to change
or select a device.
E
Text Messages
Displays all recent text messages.
F
Phone Keypad
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call
G
Do Not Disturb
Press this button to begin a call.
Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do
not display on the screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
417
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Users with phones having voice services may
see a button to access the feature. For
example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A
press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from the
SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 386). You can use the touchscreen to
place calls as well.
418
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Menu Item
Contacts
Action and Description
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the number
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Menu Item
Recent Call
List
Action and Description
You can then select an entry
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Phone
Keypad
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Call
The system begins the call.
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To call a number that is not stored in your
phone, select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
419
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and
number display on the screen along with the
call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
•
•
Signal Strength.
Battery.
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
SYNC™ 3
Text Messaging
Item
Item
End Call
Keypad
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the button
on the steering
wheel.
Mute
You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Privacy
Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the sender name and ID, if supported by
your cell phone. You can select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Hear It
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.
View
View the text on the touchscreen.
Call
To call the sender.
Reply
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm
to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Close
To exit the screen.
420
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple
CarPlay. Select the name of your device
and set the Apple CarPlay switch to off.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay
home screen and select the SYNC app.
Apple CarPlay
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer
with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest
iOS version is recommended.
Android Auto
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 367).
2. Follow the prompts on the touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on your
phone to allow access to Apple CarPlay.
1. Download the Android Auto app to your
device from Google Play to prepare your
device (this may require mobile data
usage).
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
421
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 367).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on your
device.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device (this may
require mobile data usage).
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and set the Android Auto switch to
off.
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
SYNC™ 3
To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer
icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the
bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch
the option to return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
3D city models are complete 3D models of
entire city areas including navigable roads,
parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D
landmarks and city models appear in 3D map
mode only. Coverage of these varies and
improves with updated map releases.
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
NAVIGATION
E207749
E207752
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D city
maps show detailed outlines of buildings,
visible land use, landscape features, and
detailed railroad infrastructure for the most
essential cities around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourism value.
Select the zoom out icon to see a
farther away view of the map.
E207753
You can adjust the view in preset increments.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the
map.
The information bar tells you the names of
streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over
them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on the
right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
422
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Heading up (2D map) This always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
E207750
This view is available for map
scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
E207748
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current
location.
SYNC™ 3
E251780
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.
E251779
Points of Interest (POI) grouping
icon: You can choose up to three
POI icons to display on the map. If
E207754
the chosen POIs are located close
together or are at the same location a box is
used to display a single category icon
instead of repeating the same icon, in order
to reduce clutter. When you select the box
on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the pop
up to see a list of the available POIs. You can
scroll through and select POIs from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow
will be indicated on the map by green (clear),
yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road
highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the
information is available and varies across the
US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different types
of incidents. See Settings (page 436).
You can set a destination by hovering above
a location and selecting:
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item
Description
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search
Street Address
423
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Description
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example,
you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
424
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Description
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections.
Previous Destinations
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete All
Home
Select this option to remove all previous destinations.
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select:
Yes
Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
Work
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select:
Yes
Enter a location into the search bar and press:
Save
425
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Favorites
Description
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a Favorite Select this button and enter a location into the destination bar.
Search
Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered.
Save
Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen.
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the
favorites screen.
Point of Interest (POI)
Categories
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle configuration):
Food
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
See All
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to
find what you are looking for.
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
426
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Description
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Save
This saves the destination to your favorites.
Start
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options.
Fastest
Uses the fastest moving roads possible.
Shortest
Uses the shortest distance possible.
Economical Route
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then
returns you to the map mode screen.
427
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item
Start
Action and Description
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination.
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat
route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to
the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your
destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to
cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
Screen View
Full Map
A full screen map displays during navigation.
428
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Highway Exit Info
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they
are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations.
You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired.
Turn List
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A
screen then appears and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list.
Traffic List
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires
an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route.
Navigation Settings
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 436).
Where Am I?
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen.
View Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.
Detour
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.
429
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Edit Waypoints
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information
on how to set waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can also have
the system set the
order for you by
pressing:
Optimize Order
To return to your
route press:
Go
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation route
as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass)
while on an active route. This brings up
the destination menu.
430
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination has
been selected, the screen allows you to
set the destination as a waypoint by
selecting:
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Add Waypoint
The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your
waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the
location. You can select up to five waypoints.
You can also have the system set the order for you by pressing:
Optimize Order
To return to your route, press:
Go
SYNC AppLink
The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.
First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and sent
to your SYNC AppLink app. The location of
your vehicle can be viewed within the app.
You can also view walking directions to your
vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation
cityseeker (If Equipped)
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to update
points of interest (POI) on the navigation
system.
Send To Car
You can send destinations to your navigation
system using a computer or phone using
AppLink.
431
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
E225487
SYNC™ 3
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address, phone number and a star rating.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press More Information to see a photo, a
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation
and admission price.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•
•
•
•
Restaurant
Business center
Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator
24 hour room service
Fitness center
Internet access
Pool
Wi-Fi
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate and
subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link information. It helps you locate
the best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see current
sports scores. See Apps (page 433).
432
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
The system calculates a reasonable efficient
route based on available speed limits, traffic,
and road conditions. You may know a local
short cut that is more efficient at a given time
than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you
should expect a slight difference in minutes
or miles with the SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States
and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico.
You can also visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model of
your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
SYNC™ 3
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to HERE
by going to www.here.com/mapcreator.
HERE evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink
enabled smartphone apps. When an app is
running through AppLink, you can control
main features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded. Some
apps will work with no setup. Other apps will
want you to configure your personal settings
and personalize your experience by creating
stations or favorites. We recommend you do
this at home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Lincoln is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
433
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Find Mobile Apps
Action and Description
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Lincoln
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage statistics
and debugging information. We retain this
data for only as long as necessary to provide
this service, troubleshoot, and improve
products and services and to offer you
products and services that may interest you
where allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for each
connected device the first time you select a
mobile app using the system.
Note: Lincoln reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Lincoln is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 436).
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions, apps
will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3
unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings
menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
App Permissions
The system organizes the app permissions
into groups. You can individually grant these
group permissions.You can change a
permission group status any time when not
driving, by using the settings menu. While
in the settings menu, you can also see the
data included in each group.
434
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle information,
Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed,
and/or Push notifications. You can enable all
groups or none of them during the initial app
permissions prompts. The settings menu
offers individual group permission control.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
SYNC™ 3
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click
on Coverage map and details for a complete
listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link.
Menu Item
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Note: Neither Sirius nor Lincoln is
responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in
the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link services
or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, it can help you locate the best
gas prices, find movie listings, get current
traffic alerts, view the current weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see scores
to current sports games.
Action and Description
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location
or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active
navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the
chosen area.
Map
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds.
435
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
Area
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to
10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
Sound
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and adjust
the settings for many of the system features.
To access additional settings, swipe the
screen left or right.
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the
following:
Sound Settings
Reset All
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble
Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange
Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass
Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
436
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Speed Compensated Vol.
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off.
Occupancy Mode
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings
Stereo
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media device
such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is
the active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following options
for active devices only.
Menu Item
Podcast Speed
Action and Description
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you
can choose:
Slower
Audiobook Speed
Normal
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing,
you can choose:
437
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Faster
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Cover Art Priority
Action and Description
Slower
Normal
Faster
Media Player
Cover art displays from your device’s music files. If no cover art for the files
exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art.
Gracenote®
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files.
This overrides any cover art from your device.
Gracenote® Management
Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information such as genre, artist and album.
Gracenote® Database Info
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
Device Information
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device.
Update Media Index
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.
Clock
You can adjust the following features:
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows
on the right adjust the minute. You can then
select AM or PM.
438
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
Clock Format
Select how time displays.
Auto Time Zone Update
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
Reset Clock to GPS Time
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
The system automatically saves any updates
you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access the
following:
Menu Item
Bluetooth
Action
On
Off
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device
is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing
a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a
device and the available options.
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
439
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
SYNC™ 3
To add a phone, select:
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model as
it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Menu Item
Add Phone
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
440
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth Device
You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options:
Connect
Disconnect
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected
device.
Make Primary
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete
Removes the selected device from the system.
Press the info icon next to the device name
to see phone and device information.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Auto-Download Contacts
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to
date.
441
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Sort By:
Action and Description
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose:
First Name
Last Name
Re-download Contacts
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Delete Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact
list on the connected phone.
Menu Item
Action and Description
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No Ringtone
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive a call. This option may not be available
for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
442
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No Alert (Silence)
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message.
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Mute Audio in Privacy
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when
the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming Warning
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery Notification
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low.
443
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
911 Assist
Note: For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and connect
with SYNC3.
Enabling 911 Assist
Menu Item
911 Assist
Action and Description
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can switch this feature on and off by sliding
the scrollbar as follows.
Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature on.
Setting Emergency Contacts
You can set your contacts in the phone book
for emergency quick dialing.
Ensure the phone book of your cell phone
downloaded to SYNC 3.
Menu Item
Action and Description
911 Assist
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature.
Set Emergency Contacts
Select this option as it displays on the screen.
Menu Item
Select a Contact
To activate 911 Assist from the settings
screen select:
Action and Description
Select this option under <Emergency contact 1>.
444
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
From the settings screen select:
SYNC™ 3
The screen lists contacts in the phone book.
Select the contact that you want to set as
emergency contact. You can set Emergency
Contact 2 by same process. You can set two
Emergency Contacts in total.
Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an
emergency call, the Emergency Contact
button displays on the touch screen. You
need to press the button to call the contact
through your Bluetooth phone.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
navigation, a map with your current street
information displays on the screen when 911
Assist is in process.
Menu Item
FM HD Radio
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source such
as AM or FM is the active media source.
Pressing the button allows you to access the
following features:
Action and Description
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on current
radio source, If Available)
Radio Text
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system
display radio text.
Autoset Presets (AST)
Refresh
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the
currently tuned source.
445
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM
This button is available if SiriusXM is the
active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following features:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Set Category for Seek
If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that category.
Parental Lockout
Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial
PIN is 1234.
Edit Alerts
Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an alert or delete all alerts.
You can also view your satellite radio
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this
screen. You need this number when
communicating with SiriusXM to activate,
modify or track your account.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Menu Item
Action and Description
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.
Breadcrumbs
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots.
446
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
POI Icons
Action and Description
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. A rest area POI icon is displayed on the
map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed Select POIs
by selecting:
Incident Map Icons
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map.
Route Preferences
Menu Item
Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Preferred Route
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest
Fastest
Eco
Always Use ___ Route
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred
route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
Use HOV Lanes
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance.
447
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Automatically Find Parking The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination.
Eco Time Penalty
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Dynamic Route Guidance Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based
on heavy traffic flow information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible.
Navigation Preferences
Menu Item
Action and Description
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only
448
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Source Selection
Mobile Apps
The screen lists available alternative
navigation sources using Applink.
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data plan
associated with the connected device.
Menu Item
Mobile Apps
The connected devices send data to us in
the United States. The encrypted information
includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number,
anonymous usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.
Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible
with the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. We are not
responsible for any additional charges you
may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device.
Action and Description
On
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on
SYNC 3.
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu
disables automatic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
Off
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile Apps
This provides information on the current state of available app updates.
There are three possible statuses:
449
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
Update Needed
Up-To-Date
Updating Mobile Apps…
The system has detected a new app No update is required.
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
The system is trying to receive an update.
Request Update
Select this button if an update is required and
you want to request this update manually. For
example, when your mobile device is connected
to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select:
Request Update
All Apps
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
There may also be SYNC 3
enabled apps listed under
these options.
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing
the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group.
Note: We is not responsible or liable for any
damages or loss of privacy relating to usage
of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle
data that you approve us to provide to an
app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
450
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Language
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.
Distance
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Touch Screen Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen.
Automatic System Updates
When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have
an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection.
About SYNC
Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Software Licenses
Documentation of the software license for the system.
Master Reset
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal
data.
Wi-Fi & Hotspot (If Equipped)
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
System Wi-Fi
You can access the following:
451
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Action and Description
Wi-Fi
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates.
Available Networks
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may
require a security code to connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such
as the signal strength, connection status and security type.
Wi-Fi Available Notifications The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already
connected.
Vehicle Hotspot
You can access the following:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Wi-Fi Hotspot On/Off
Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.
Settings
Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and password.
Data Usage
Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.
Manage Devices
Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.
452
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.
Note: It is the account owner’s responsibility
to remove the vehicle from the vehicle
network carrier account when ownership of
the vehicle is transferred. If the owner would
like to remove the vehicle from the account
for any reason, please contact your vehicle
network carrier for more information.
Note: Data, such as the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between us and the vehicle
network carrier to provide the Vehicle
Hotspot service in accordance with your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability, and may be used to enable
a seamless transition from an old to new
embedded modem and to confirm any
updates are successfully delivered.
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color all
the way down to zero intensity.
Note: For your convenience data usage may
be available for monitoring under Settings
but may not reflect actual or current usage.
The vehicle network carrier is responsible
for providing information about your account.
Please contact the vehicle network carrier
for more information.
Vehicle
Note: We may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle, including
security updates and bug fixes, to keep
connected services current, like Vehicle
Hotspot, without prior notice to you.
Door Keypad Code
453
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these
features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Select this button to add or erase a personal
door keypad code. To add or erase a
personal code, you first need to enter the
five-digit factory set code. You can find this
code on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box or from your authorized dealer.
SYNC™ 3
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message
Action and Description
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera Delay
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner's manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your system.
You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
454
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Action and Description
Display Off
The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen to switch it back on.
Brightness
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode
You can select:
Auto Dim
Auto
The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside
light level.
Day
The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing.
Night
The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier.
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions.
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings by
selecting the following options.
455
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Advanced Mode
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contact's name with you before
making a call.
Voice Command List
Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands
when you press the voice.
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the system
is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode, a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit code
must be entered to enable and disable valet
mode. You can use any PIN you chose but
you must use the same PIN to disable valet
mode. The system asks you to input the
code.
Note: If the system is locked and you cannot
remember the PIN, please contact the
Customer Relationship Center.
For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
Ford
Lincoln
United States and United States: 1-800Canada: 1-800-392521-4140
3673
Canada: 1-800-3879333
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
456
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website.
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
There is background noise The audio control settings on your cell
during a phone call.
phone may be affecting SYNC 3
performance.
Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
Possible cell phone malfunction.
cannot hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for
the microphone icon on the phone screen.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they The system may need to be restarted.
cannot hear me.
To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the
door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that
your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not able to
download my phonebook. Possible cell phone malfunction.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
457
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my
Limitations on your cell phone's capabSYNC 3 phonebook is
ility.
empty or is missing
contacts.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to
your cell phone's memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your
device, then trying again.
I am having trouble
connecting my cell phone
Possible cell phone malfunction.
to SYNC 3.
Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative
to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC 3.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
458
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
iPhone
Possible solution
•
•
•
•
•
Go to your cell phone's Settings.
Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with your
vehicle make and model to enter the next menu.
Turn Show Notifications on.
Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system
to activate this settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if
the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone.
459
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not
supported.
Audible text messages do
not work on my cell phone.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through
Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone limitation.
Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual
for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider
and software version.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable.
Possible device malfunction.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your
vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or
active security settings.
460
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does not recognize my device when I start This is a device limitation.
my vehicle.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very
hot or cold temperatures.
This is a device-dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
SYNC 3 does not recognize music that is on my
device.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have
started the media player on your device.
The device is not connected.
The device is in a bad state.
Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then
reconnect it to SYNC 3.
Your music files may not contain the
correct artist, song title, album or genre
information.
Make sure that all song details are populated.
The file may be corrupted.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version.
The song may have copyright protection Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass
that does not allow it to play.
storage to media transfer protocol class.
The file format is not supported by SYNC Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 396).
3.
The device needs to be re-indexed.
Update media index. See Settings (page 436).
The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.
461
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3.
When I connect my device,
I sometimes do not hear
This is a device limitation.
any sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB, select AirPlay from the devices
Control Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay
from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
SYNC 3 does not display
The device or media player is incompatConnect a compatible device or media player.
the song information,
ible.
repeat, or shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Issue
Failed connection.
Possible cause
Possible solution
Password error.
Verify password.
Weak signal.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.
Multiple Access points within range with Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use the default name unless
the same SSID.
it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address.
462
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Issue
Disconnecting after
successful connection.
Possible cause
Possible solution
Weak signal probably due to distance
Position the vehicle close to the access point with the front of the
from the access point, obstruction or high vehicle facing the access point direction and remove obstacles if
interference.
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones may
cause interference.
Poor signal seen by SYNC There may be an obstruction between
3 despite being near a
SYNC 3 and the access point.
access point.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try positioning the
vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the access point. If you
have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the access point. If all windows are tinted, you can
open the windows in the direction of the access point if that is feasible.
Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such
as opening the garage door.
An access point is not
The access point was defined as a
listed in the list of available hidden network.
networks.
Please set the network to visible and try again.
463
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Issue
Possible cause
SYNC 3 is not seen when SYNC 3 does not currently provide a
searching for Wi-Fi
access point.
networks from your phone
or other devices.
Possible solution
SYNC 3 currently does not provide an access point.
Software download takes
too long.
Poor signal strength, too far from the
Check the signal quality (under network details), if SYNC 3 indicates
access point, access point is supporting good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped access
multiple connections, slow Internet
point where the environment is more predictable.
connection or other problems.
SYNC 3 seems to connect
with a access point and the
signal strength is excellent
but the software is not
being updated.
It is possible that there is no new softTest the connection with another device, if the access point requires
ware. The connected access point may a subscription, you may contact the service provider.
be a managed one and it requires either
a subscription or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
464
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Issue
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Find
You did not connect an Applink CompatMobile Apps," SYNC 3
ible phone to SYNC 3.
does not find any applications.
Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS
2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone to SYNC 3
in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable.
My phone is connected,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of
the app from your phone's app store. Make sure the app is running
on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have
a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps are not installed
and running on your mobile device.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC 3 find the application if
you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select it and restart the app.
If the app does not have that option, select the phone's settings menu
My phone is connected, my Sometimes apps do not properly close and select 'Apps', then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
app(s) are running, but I still and re-open their connection to SYNC 3, Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Find Mobile
Apps" on SYNC 3.
cannot find any apps.
over ignition cycles, for example.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home
button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu.
465
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Issue
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
Possible cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
There is a Bluetooth issue on some older Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on your phone. If you are
versions of the Android operating system in your vehicle, SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-connect
that may cause apps that were found on to your phone if you press the "Phone" button.
your previous vehicle drive to not be
found again if you did not switch
Bluetooth off.
My iPhone is connected,
my app is running, I
You may need to reset the USB connecrestarted the app but I still tion to SYNC 3.
cannot find it on SYNC 3.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the
USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the
application and restart it.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's
I have an Android phone. I
volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the
found and started my
The Bluetooth volume on the phone may
device.
media app on SYNC 3, but
be low.
there is no sound or the
sound is very low.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on
my phone listed in the
SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
Menu.
Some Android devices have a limited
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC 3 to find. If
number of Bluetooth ports that apps can the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's
use to connect. If you have more AppLink settings menu on the phone.
apps on your phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports, you will not see
all of your apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
466
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue
SYNC 3 does not understand what I am saying.
Possible cause
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
Possible solution
Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice
commands at the beginning of their respective sections.
Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list
of voice commands there.
You may be speaking too soon or at the Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command.
wrong time.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media
section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device.
For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain".
SYNC 3 does not understand the name of a song
or artist.
You may not be saying the name exactly Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix
as it appears on your device.
featuring Jennifer Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you
have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name may have some
Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not
special characters that are not being
have any special characters like *, - or +.
recognized by SYNC 3.
467
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
SYNC 3 does not under- You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your phonebook.
stand or is calling the
wrong contact when I want
The contact name may contain special
to make a call.
characters.
Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your
phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe
Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters
like *, - or +.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the contact names stored on your cell phone.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
You may not be saying the name exactly Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE.
recognizing foreign names as it appears on your phonebook.
Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the
stored on my cell phone.
soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you,
giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting.
468
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue
Possible cause
Possible solution
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign tracks, You may be saying the foreign names
artists, albums, genres and using the currently selected language for
playlist names from my
SYNC 3.
media player or USB flash
drive.
The system generates
voice prompts and the
SYNC 3 uses text-to-speech voice prompt
pronunciation of some
technology.
words may not be accurate
for my language.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names
(for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunciation for these artists.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded
human voice.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
469
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue
Possible cause and solution
Personal Profiles have not been set up.
An invalid profile name was entered.
I cannot create a profile.
A memory button was not selected when prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park or was shifted out of
Run or Park while creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a keyfob when prompted.
The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and
an overwrite was declined.
I cannot link a keyfob.
A profile recall was performed while linking a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park, or was shifted out of
Run or Park while linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
My personalized settings do not save.
The unsaved setting is not supported by Personal Profiles.
A different Personal Profile is active than expected.
470
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue
Possible cause and solution
Another user has changed settings for the wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked to a profile.
My profile will not recall.
The keyfob being used is not linked to a profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start is being pressed on a linked
keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
My preset positions recall but my profile does not.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions do not.
The preset positions are the same as the Guest or previously active
profile.
471
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue
Possible cause and solution
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the Personal Profiles menu. You may
need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a keyfob.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed. This could happen if you
let dealership add a new keyfob to replace lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Master Reset had been performed without your acknowledgement.
General
Issue
The language selected for
the instrument cluster and
information and entertainment display does not
match the SYNC 3
language (phone, USB,
Bluetooth audio, voice
control and voice prompts).
Possible cause
Possible solution
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text
display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most
popular languages spoken. If the selected language is not available,
SYNC 3 remains in the current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support the currently
selected language for the instrument
cluster and information and entertainment SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
display.
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
472
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore
functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text
messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio
Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then
resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
473
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit the online
store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
Lincoln Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
•
Side window deflectors*.
Interior Style
•
•
Floor mats.
Rear seat entertainment*.
Lifestyle
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ash cup or smoker's package.
Bluetooth speakers*.
Camping tents*.
Cargo organization and management.
Conversation mirror.
Hitch-mounted bike carrier*.
Racks and carriers.
Tablet cradle.
Trailer towing accessories.
474
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Peace of Mind
•
•
•
•
•
•
Car cover*.
Locking fuel plug.
Remote start.
Roadside assistance kits*.
Vehicle security systems.
Wheel locks.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.
•
•
An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly if
the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
If you or an authorized dealer add any
non-Ford electrical accessories or
components to your vehicle, you may
adversely affect battery performance and
durability. In addition, you may also
adversely affect the performance of other
electrical systems in the vehicle.
475
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lincoln Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH
LINCOLN PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE
PLAN.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans
(U.S. Only)
Lincoln Protect means peace of mind. It’s the
extended service plan backed by the Lincoln
Motor Company, and provides more
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage. When you visit your
Lincoln Dealer, insist on genuine Lincoln
Protect extended service plans!
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan Can
Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Lincoln Protect
extended service plan. With Lincoln Protect
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
Rental Car Reimbursement
There are four mechanical Lincoln Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1st day Rental Benefit
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete it’s
probably easier to list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Lincoln dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
476
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the
day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
•
•
•
•
Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage and other transportation.
Lincoln Protect
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
Lincoln Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
•
•
Engine belts.
Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Lincoln Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved with
no credit check or hassles. To learn more,
call our Lincoln Protect extended service
plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Protect extended
service plan. Lincoln Protect extended
service plan is the only service contract
backed by Lincoln Motor Company of
Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you
purchase, Lincoln Protect extended service
plan provides benefits such as:
•
•
•
Complete the information below and mail to:
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
477
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lincoln Protect (CANADA ONLY)
•
Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.
Lincoln Protect
There are several Lincoln Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each
plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Protect
extended service plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Protect extended service plan that
is right for you.
478
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 343).
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
479
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km)
of the message appearing. Make sure you
reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after
each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator
Reset (page 287).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or
5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km) between oil change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
480
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
481
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Six Months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s)
Hazard warning system operation
Battery performance
Horn operation
Engine air filter
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses
Exhaust system
Suspension components for leaks or damage
482
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Exterior lamps operation
Steering and linkage
1
1
2
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
For oil and fluid leaks
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots
Washer spray and wiper operation
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
483
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Interval
Vehicle Use and Example
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi (5,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
484
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
2
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (All Wheel Drive only).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
1
2
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 287).
485
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace engine air filter.
1
At 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Change engine coolant. 2
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt or belts.
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt or belts.
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance
for the interval.
2
3
4
Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or 50,000 mi (80,000 km).
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
486
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).
Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
487
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
As required
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Replace engine air filter.
Extended Hot and Cold climate operation
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
*
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Hot Climates only
488
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in off-road (unpaved, sandy, dusty) and Mountainous conditions
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Replace engine air filter.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or 6 months
*
Change engine oil and filter.
Perform multi-point inspection.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 287).
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
489
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (AWD only)
in your vehicle does not require any normal
scheduled maintenance. The PTU lubricant
will be more likely to require a fluid change
if the vehicle has extended periods of
extreme or severe duty cycle driving.
Changing or checking the PTU lubricant is
not necessary unless the unit has been
submerged in water, shows sign of leakage.
Contact your authorized dealer for service.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles
operating in the Middle East, North Africa,
Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar
climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 5,000 mi
(8,000 km).
490
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air filter
and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure
to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles
operated in these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
491
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
492
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
493
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
494
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
495
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
496
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
497
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
498
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
499
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
500
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
501
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
502
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
503
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
504
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
505
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
506
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
507
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
508
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
509
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Repair Order #:
Dealer stamp
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
E146852
510
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes
and brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the following
table. We do not provide special provisions
or conditions for installations or use.
511
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.
Appendices
Car
E239120
512
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
513
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Truck
E239121
Frequency Band MHz
Maximum output power Watt (Peak RMS)
Antenna Positions
1-30
50
1
50-54
50
2, 3
68-88
50
2, 3
514
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Frequency Band MHz
Maximum output power Watt (Peak RMS)
Antenna Positions
142-176
50
2, 3
380-512
50
2, 3
806-870
10
2, 3
Note: After the installation of radio frequency
transmitters, check for disturbances from
and to all electrical equipment in your
vehicle, both in the standby and transmit
modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields generated
inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter
installed do not exceed applicable human
exposure requirements.
515
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
•
•
You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
•
You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
•
Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
516
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
Appendices
•
•
Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
•
•
•
SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
517
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
•
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
518
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
•
•
Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (I) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
519
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
•
Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
520
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
Appendices
•
•
•
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
•
•
•
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
521
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
522
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
•
You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
•
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
523
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•
The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
524
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
525
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
•
I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
Appendices
•
•
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s
fees and expenses.
iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or without notice to you. You agree
to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to
time to review the then current version of
this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
526
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
3.1 License Limitations
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
•
3. Software License
•
Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
527
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
•
•
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
528
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
5. Limitation of Liability
•
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
Appendices
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
7. Assignment
•
You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
529
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
8.6
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
530
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights
reserved
531
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
Appendices
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
532
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these EndUser Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
533
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing Data
for the United States shall contain the
following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service® 20XX.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.”
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provisions
apply to the Data for Canada, which may
include or reflect data from third party
licensors (“Third Party Data”), including
Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada
(“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department of
Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provisions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is
licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective
of the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action alleging any loss,
injury or damages, direct or indirect,
which may result from the use or
possession of such Data; or (ii) in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage media
of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the
copy; or (iii) other materials packaged
with the copy, such as user manuals or
end user license agreements: “This data
includes information taken with permis-
534
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
sion from Canadian authorities, including
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®,
© The Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise
agreed by the parties, in connection with
the provision of any portion of the Data
for the Territory of Canada to End-Users
as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such EndUsers, in a reasonably conspicuous
manner, with terms (set forth with other
end user terms required to be provided
Appendices
under the Agreement, or as otherwise
may be provided, by Client) which shall
include the following provisions on
behalf of the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data
of licensors, including Her Majesty the
Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department
of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on
an “as is” basis. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, make no guarantees,
representations or warranties
respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or
fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which may
result from the use or possession of
the data or the Data. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents
from and against any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
535
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
the cause of the claim, demand or
action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the
use or possession of the data or the
Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the
parties under the Agreement. To the
extent that any of the provisions of this
Section are inconsistent with, or conflict
with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.
Appendices
Ecuador
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: “Fuente:
INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Territory
Notice
Argentina IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Guadeloupe,
French
Guiana
and
Martinique
Mexico
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-201101- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO
DE 2011”
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
536
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Country
Notice
Jordan
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The foregoing notice requirement for
Jordan Data is a material term
of the Agreement. If Client or
any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet
such requirement, HERE shall
have the right to terminate
Client’s license with respect to
the Jordan Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of Jordan
(“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise
Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities
for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan
or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition,
Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any)
and End-Users are restricted from using
the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications
if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity
using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or
(ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes
Appendices
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications”
shall mean Geomarketing applications,
GIS applications, mobile business asset
management applications, call center
applications, telematics applications,
public organization Internet applications
or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and
agrees that in certain countries of the
Europe Territory, Client will need to
obtain rights directly from third party
RDS-TMC code providers to receive and
use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to
deliver to End-Users Transactions in any
way derived from or based on such
Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE
shall deliver the Data incorporating
Traffic Codes to Client only after
receiving certification from Client of its
having obtained such rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends
for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for
Belgium, provide the following notice to
the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium
are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license
granted to Client relating to making,
selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a
map fixed on a paper or paper-like
medium): (a) such license with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain is
conditioned on Client’s entering into and
complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to
create and sell paper maps, Client’s
paying to the OS any and all applicable
paper map royalties, and Client’s
complying with the OS copyright notice
requirements; (b) such license for selling
or otherwise distributing for charge with
respect to Data for the Territory of Czech
Republic is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining prior written consent from
537
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling
or distributing with respect to Data for the
Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on
Client’s obtaining a permit from
Bundesamt für Landestopografie of
Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from
using Data for the Territory of France to
create paper maps with a scale between
1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is
restricted from using any Data to create,
sell or distribute paper maps that are the
same or substantially similar, in terms of
data content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land
Survey of Sweden.
Appendices
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data
for the Territory of Great Britain, Client
acknowledges and agrees that the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct
action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see
Section IV(D) below) and paper map
requirements (see Section IV(B) above)
contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Country(ies)
Notice
Austria
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
France
Germany
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Great Britain “Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright
and database right 2010
Contains Royal Mail data ©
Royal Mail copyright and
database right 2010”
Greece
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”
Hungary
“Copyright © 2003; TopMap Ltd.”
“© EuroGeographics”
538
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Italy
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed al
tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Norway
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Portugal
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Spain
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Sweden
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Switzerland
“Topografische Grundlage:
© Bundesamt für
Landestopographie.
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not received
approvals to distribute map data for the
following countries in such respective
countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan,
Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may
Appendices
update such list from time to time. The
license rights granted to Client under this
TL with respect to the Data for such
countries are contingent upon Client’s
compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations, including, without limitation,
any required licenses or approvals to
distribute the Application incorporating
such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing RDSTMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall
contain the following notice: “Product
incorporates traffic location codes which
is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and
its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics
Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND
CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE
OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES,
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER
HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
539
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT
BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING
CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND
AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN
ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH
OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE,
END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR
ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED
THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE
SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH
PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM
AROSE.
Appendices
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND
HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS
FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY
DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH,
ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE,
OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD
AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT
GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS
TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING
TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE.
THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL
BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER MAKES NO
WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR
PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES
OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL
AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE
TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A)
ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS,
OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED
BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED
BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY
IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
540
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER
RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM
AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF
ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY
FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S
USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING
IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view
Appendices
it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not
remove any copyright notices that appear
and do not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if
you fail to comply with these terms and
conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform
substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt,
and (b) any support services provided by
NAV2 shall be substantially as described in
applicable written materials provided to you
by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will
make commercially reasonable efforts to
solve any problem issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with
a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty
541
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
is void if failure of the Data has resulted from
accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Data will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or
thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither
these remedies nor any product support
services offered by NAV2 are available
without proof of purchase from an authorized
international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Appendices
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers
and are protected by applicable copyright
and other intellectual property law and
treaties. The Data are provided solely on the
basis of a license to use, not sale.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder shall be submitted to the
Shanghai International Economic and Trade
Arbitration Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
542
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Entire Agreement
Appendices
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
543
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
544
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave radiation
motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter the
frequency, increase the power or change the
characteristics and functions of the original
design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference be
detected, immediately stop using the device
and only resume usage after ensuring that
there is no longer any interference. For the
legal telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial, scientific
and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept certain
terms and conditions. The following is a brief
summary of the terms and conditions that
apply to you. To view the full terms and
conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA
Products and/or Services, please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for your
personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to provide
SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
545
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Website
Appendices
SUNA Products and/or Services are intended
as an aid to personal motoring and travel
planning, and do not provide comprehensive
or accurate information on all occasions. On
occasions, you may experience additional
delay as a result of using SUNA Products
and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is
not intended, or suitable, for use in
applications where time of arrival or driving
directions may impact the safety of the public
or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and active,
remain at all times responsible for observing
all relevant laws and codes of safe driving.
In particular, you agree to only actively
operate SUNA Products and/or Services
when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and
it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of the
SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable for
technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA
Products and/or Services at any time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the
manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any
third party for any damages either direct,
indirect, incidental, consequential or
otherwise arising out of the use of or inability
to use SUNA Products and/or Services even
if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised
of the possibility of such damages. You also
acknowledge that the neither Intelematics
nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any
warranties that relate to the availability,
accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products
546
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
and/or Services, and to the extent which it
is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State or
Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development may
mean that some information is not entirely
up-to-date. The information in this document
is subject to change without notice.
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
Brazil
Ghana
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
Argentina
E253824
Jordan
E197509
E207816
E253823
Canada
IC: 850K-11545917
Malaysia
European Union EU
E253822
E207818
547
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Mexico
Morocco
Philippines
E207821
E198001
Oman
Russia
E253817
E253816
E253812
E253813
Moldova
E197811
548
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Serbia
South Africa
E197844
E198002
Singapore
South Korea
Taiwan
E203679
Ukraine
E253820
E253819
E253818
549
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid
Range Radar
Ghana
Argentina
E207817
United States of America
E269662
FCC ID: OUC11545917
Jordan
E269659
E269660
550
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Morocco
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Passive Anti-Theft System
Argentina
E269661
E269663
South Africa
E274065
E269664
551
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Brazil
Djibouti
Jamaica
E269675
E274068
E274067
Canada
Ghana
Jordan
E269674
E269666
IC: 850K-11545917
552
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Malaysia
Paraguay
Serbia
E269673
E274066
E269672
Morocco
Pakistan
Singapore
E269670
E275754
E269676
553
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
South Africa
United Arab Emirates
Vietnam
E269667
E269668
E269677
Ukraine
United States of America
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Radio Transceiver Module
FCC ID: OUC11545917
Canada
IC: 3659A-F03AM315RX
IC: 3659A-F04AM902TRX
E269671
554
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Djibouti
Jordan
Pakistan
E272192
E272194
E269684
Jamaica
Morocco
Paraguay
E272193
E269683
E272195
555
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Serbia
Ukraine
United States of America
FCC ID: LTQF03AM315RX
FCC ID: LTQF04AM902TRX
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Blind Spot Information System
Canada
RSS-310 compliant, per FCC Test report no.:
1-8707/14-01-03
E269681
E269682
South Africa
United Arab Emirates
Ghana
E269695
E269685
E272196
556
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Malaysia
United Arab Emirates
Vietnam
E269697
E269694
E269693
South Africa
United States of America
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
E269696
557
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Wireless Charging
South Korea
United Arab Emirates
E282218
E272903
E273475
Canada
Radio Frequency Certifications for
SYNC 3
IC: 216B-FG185SG32MH
Brazil
United States of America
FCC ID: ACJ-FG-185-SG32MH
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Cruise Control Module
Canada
IC: 3432A-0065TR
United States of America
E252722
FCC ID: L2C0065TR
558
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Appendices
Radio Frequency Certifications for
Body Control Module
FCC ID : N5F-A08TDA
Canada
United States of America
IC: 7812A-A2C738448
FCC ID : M3N-A2C931423
Model # : M : A2C750526
FCC ID : M3N-A2C931426
Model # : M : A2C750561
FCC ID : N5F-A08TAA
United States of America
FCC ID : N5F-A08TDA
FCC ID: M3NA2C738448
Model # : M : A2C750526
Radio Frequency Statement for Audio
Unit
Model # : M : A2C750561
Canada
Radio Frequency Certification for Keys
and Remote Controls
IC: 3043A-UP375AHU
Canada
IC: 3248A-A08TDA
United States
FCC ID: NT8-16UP375AHU
FCC ID : M3N-A2C931423
IC : 7812A-A2C931423
FCC ID : M3N-A2C931426
IC: 7812A-A2C931426
FCC ID : N5F-A08TAA
IC: 3248A-A08TAA
559
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
560
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Index
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................125
About This Manual............................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................187
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................188
Accessories....................................................474
Exterior Style........................................................474
Interior Style.........................................................474
Lifestyle.................................................................474
Peace of Mind......................................................474
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............204
Active Park Assist..........................................193
Automatic Steering into Parking Space........196
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature.............196
Troubleshooting the System.............................197
Using Active Park Assist....................................194
Adaptive Headlamps......................................91
System Check........................................................92
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................298
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................299
Vertical Aim Adjustment...................................298
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............104
Adjusting the Pedals......................................83
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.....................80
Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................104
Keyless Warning Alert........................................104
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................104
End of Travel Position..........................................80
Memory Feature....................................................80
AFS
Seek, Next or Previous.........................................81
See: Adaptive Headlamps...................................91
Audio System................................................364
Airbag Disposal...............................................58
Air Conditioning
Audio Unit......................................................366
See: Climate Control..........................................125
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter...............301
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................79
All-Wheel Drive..............................................179
Ambient Lighting.............................................93
Adjusting the Brightness.....................................93
Changing the Color..............................................93
Switching Ambient Lighting Off........................93
Switching Ambient Lighting On........................93
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................79
Arming the Alarm..................................................79
Disarming the Alarm.............................................79
Appendices......................................................511
Apps.................................................................433
.................................................................................433
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link......................434
At a Glance........................................................16
561
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Audio Control....................................................81
General Information...........................................364
Adjusting the Volume........................................366
Changing Radio Stations..................................366
Ejecting the CD...................................................366
Inserting a CD.....................................................366
Rear Seat Audio Controls.................................366
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off............366
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.......366
Autolamps.........................................................87
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........88
Automatic Climate Control.........................125
Setting the Blower Motor Speed....................125
Setting the Temperature...................................125
Switching Auto Mode On and Off...................125
Switching Defrost On and Off..........................125
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................125
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off..........125
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................125
Index
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off.......................................................................125
Automatic High Beam Control....................89
B
Specifications......................................................350
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L........355
Battery
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................360
Specifications......................................................357
Switching the System On and Off....................90
See: Changing the 12V Battery......................295
Automatic Transmission...............................175
Blind Spot Information System..................219
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................178
Brake-Shift Interlock............................................177
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................178
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission.............176
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission................................175
Switching the System Off and On...................221
System Errors.......................................................221
System Limitations..............................................221
Using the System...............................................220
Body Styling Kits............................................312
Bonnet Lock
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................292
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............282
Center Console.............................................156
Booster Seats..................................................32
Console Refrigerator and Freezer..................156
Second Row Center Console...........................156
Adding Transmission Fluid .............................293
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level........293
Autowipers.......................................................84
Auxiliary Power Points.................................154
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................154
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................154
Locations...............................................................154
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................179
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................304
Catalytic Converter.......................................172
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System...............219
Types of Booster Seats.......................................33
Brake Fluid Check........................................294
Brakes...............................................................187
General Information............................................187
Breaking-In.....................................................245
Bulb Specification Chart.............................362
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................173
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing.......................................................174
Changing a Bulb...........................................300
Front Direction Indicator Lamp........................301
Front Fog Lamp..................................................300
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp.............300
LED Lamps............................................................301
License Plate Lamp.............................................301
C
Changing a Fuse..........................................278
Cabin Air Filter...............................................129
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L.......349
Changing a Road Wheel.............................333
Fuses.....................................................................278
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................354
562
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Capacities and Specifications...................343
Cargo Nets......................................................231
Car Wash
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................334
Tire Change Procedure....................................335
Index
Changing the 12V Battery..........................295
Changing the Engine Air Filter..................301
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................297
Front Wiper Blades............................................298
Rear Window Wiper Blade...............................298
Checking MyKey System Status.................66
MyKey Distance....................................................66
Number of Admin Keys.......................................66
Number of MyKeys...............................................66
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................297
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................46
Child Restraint Positioning...........................35
Child Safety.......................................................18
Under Hood.........................................................305
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................309
Cleaning the Interior....................................307
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior...............................................................307
Cleaning the Wheels....................................310
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................306
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................66
Climate.............................................................410
Climate Control..............................................125
Climate Controlled Seats.............................147
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................224
System Limitations.............................................224
Using the System...............................................222
Cruise Control...................................................81
Principle of Operation.......................................203
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................203
Customer Assistance..................................254
D
Data Recording................................................10
General Information..............................................18
Cooled Seats........................................................148
Heated Seats........................................................147
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.......................................10
Child Safety Locks..........................................37
Collision Warning System..........................226
Left-Hand Side.......................................................37
Right-Hand Side....................................................37
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................226
See: Engine Coolant Check............................288
Daytime Running Lamps...............................89
Direction Indicators........................................92
Doors and Locks.............................................68
Drive Control.................................................229
Materials...............................................................303
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........57
Creating a MyKey...........................................65
Driver Alert......................................................212
Cleaning the Engine....................................306
Cleaning the Exterior..................................304
Programming and Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................65
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................50
Cleaning the Headlamps..................................304
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................305
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................305
Stripes or Graphics............................................305
Underbody...........................................................305
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................222
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................309
Cleaning Products........................................303
Coolant Check
False Alerts..........................................................225
Switching the System Off and On..................225
System Errors......................................................225
563
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Lincoln Drive Control........................................229
Using Driver Alert................................................213
Children and Airbags............................................51
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment..........................................................51
Driving Aids....................................................212
Driving Hints..................................................245
Index
Driving Through Water...............................245
DRL
Engine Oil Check.........................................286
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................89
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................286
Engine Specifications - 3.5L......................343
E
Economical Driving......................................245
Electromagnetic Compatibility....................511
Emission Law...................................................171
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance..............172
Tampering With a Noise Control System.......171
End User License Agreement....................516
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .....................................516
Engine Block Heater....................................162
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................163
Engine Coolant Check................................288
Adding Coolant...................................................288
Coolant Change.................................................290
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management...................................................292
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................290
Recycled Coolant...............................................290
Severe Climates.................................................290
Engine Emission Control..............................171
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................77
Adding Engine Oil..............................................286
Drivebelt Routing................................................343
Event Data Recording
Engine Specifications - 3.7L.......................344
See: Data Recording.............................................10
Drivebelt Routing................................................344
Export Unique Options...................................14
Exterior Mirrors................................................95
Entertainment................................................396
AM/FM Radio.......................................................399
Apps........................................................................410
Bluetooth Stereo or USB..................................408
CD (If equipped)..................................................407
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)..............403
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated).........399
Sources.................................................................398
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information....................................410
USB Ports..............................................................410
Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks...........................240
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................242
Hitches..................................................................240
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................243
Safety Chains.......................................................241
Trailer Brake Controller Connector...............242
Trailer Brakes........................................................241
Trailer Lamps.......................................................242
564
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).......................................................240
When Towing a Trailer.......................................242
Auto-dimming Feature........................................96
Blind Spot Information System..........................97
Direction Indicator Mirrors ................................96
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................96
Heated Exterior Mirrors ......................................96
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror..............................96
Memory Mirrors ....................................................96
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................95
Puddle Lamps........................................................96
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................39
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.......................................42
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................40
Third Row Seatbelt Stowage.............................40
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy..................39
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................333
Floor Mats......................................................246
Index
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps..........................................91
Foot Pedals
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................59
Headrest
See: Head Restraints...........................................131
Intelligent Access.................................................59
Head Restraints..............................................131
See: Adjusting the Pedals...................................83
General Maintenance Information...........479
Front Fog Lamps..............................................91
Front Passenger Sensing System..............52
Fuel and Refueling........................................164
Fuel Consumption.........................................170
Multi-Point Inspection........................................482
Owner Checks and Services...........................480
Protecting Your Investment..............................479
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.............................479
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................479
Adjusting the Head Restraint............................131
Tilting Head Restraints ......................................133
Advertised Capacity...........................................170
Fuel Economy.......................................................170
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................165
Fuel Quality.....................................................165
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................165
Fuel Shutoff...................................................249
Fuses...............................................................262
Fuse Specification Chart............................262
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel............271
Power Distribution Box.....................................262
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............149
Gauges............................................................100
Gearbox
See: Transmission................................................175
Front Seats............................................................146
Second-Row Heated Seats...............................147
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................258
Getting the Services You Need................254
Heated Steering Wheel................................82
Heating
Away From Home..............................................254
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................126
Global Opening and Closing.......................95
Closing the Windows...........................................95
Opening the Windows.........................................95
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake.............................................188
Hazard Flashers............................................249
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.......................298
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................88
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp............................300
565
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................128
Heated Rear Window...................................128
Heated Seats..................................................146
See: Climate Control..........................................125
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................127
General Hints.......................................................126
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................126
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................126
Recommended Settings for Cooling..............127
Recommended Settings for Heating..............126
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................188
Home Screen................................................384
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............282
Index
I
Transmission.........................................................124
Installing Child Restraints.............................20
In California (U.S. Only)...............................255
Information Display Control.........................82
Information Displays.....................................105
General Information............................................105
Information Messages..................................112
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................113
AdvanceTrac™........................................................113
Alarm........................................................................114
Automatic Engine Shutdown.............................114
AWD.........................................................................115
Battery and Charging System...........................116
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System................................................................117
Brake System.........................................................117
Collision Warning System..................................118
Doors and Locks...................................................118
Fuel..........................................................................119
Keys and Intelligent Access...............................119
Lane Keeping System........................................120
Maintenance.........................................................120
MyKey......................................................................121
Park Aid..................................................................122
Power Steering....................................................123
Seats.......................................................................123
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................124
Traction Control...................................................124
Child Seats.............................................................20
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts...........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................26
Using Tether Straps..............................................28
Instrument Cluster........................................100
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................88
Instrument Panel Overview...........................16
Interior Lamps..................................................92
Keyless Entry.....................................................71
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad..............71
Keyless Starting.............................................158
Ignition Modes.....................................................158
Keys and Remote Controls..........................59
L
Lane Keeping System..................................214
Third Row Dome Lamps......................................92
Switching the System On and Off...................215
Interior Mirror...................................................97
Liftgate...............................................................74
Lighting Control..............................................86
Auto-Dimming Mirror............................................97
Second Row Illuminated Vanity Mirror............97
Introduction.........................................................7
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam.................87
Headlamp High Beam.........................................87
Lighting..............................................................86
J
General Information.............................................86
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................250
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................250
Jump Starting.......................................................251
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................250
Removing the Jumper Cables........................252
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services......12
Lincoln Protect..............................................476
Lincoln Protect (CANADA ONLY)....................477
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................476
Load Carrying.................................................231
Load Limit.......................................................232
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................236
566
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
K
Index
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................232
Locking and Unlocking.................................68
Activating Intelligent Access.............................69
Autolock..................................................................70
Autounlock.............................................................70
Battery Saver...........................................................71
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock....................70
Illuminated Entry.....................................................71
Illuminated Exit........................................................71
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................68
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside............69
Power Door Locks................................................68
Remote Control.....................................................68
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.....................................................................69
Luggage Covers............................................231
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................333
M
Maintenance...................................................281
General Information............................................281
Media Hub......................................................367
Memory Function..........................................135
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................136
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
.............................................................................136
Saving a PreSet Position...................................136
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................105
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................94
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............483
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™..............................483
Normal Maintenance Intervals........................485
O
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Moonroof..........................................................98
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................287
Oil Check
Closing the Moonroof and Sunshades...........99
Opening the Sunshade and Moonroof...........98
Venting the Moonroof.........................................99
Opening and Closing the Hood...............282
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L.................................345
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L.................................346
MyKey Troubleshooting................................66
MyKey™..............................................................64
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................260
Principle of Operation..........................................64
Overhead Console........................................157
See: Engine Oil Check......................................286
Closing the Hood...............................................282
Opening the Hood.............................................282
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............260
N
P
Navigation......................................................422
Parking Aids....................................................192
cityseeker..............................................................431
Destination Mode...............................................423
Map Mode............................................................422
Navigation Map Updates..................................432
Navigation Menu................................................428
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link......................432
567
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
SYNC AppLink......................................................431
Waypoints.............................................................430
Principle of Operation........................................192
Parking Brake.................................................188
Passive Anti-Theft System............................77
SecuriLock®............................................................77
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................77
Index
Pedals................................................................83
Perchlorate........................................................12
Personal Safety System™..............................48
One-Touch Down..................................................94
One-Touch Up.......................................................94
Window Lock..........................................................94
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................48
Protecting the Environment..........................15
Puncture
Phone...............................................................414
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................333
During a Phone Call............................................419
Making Calls.........................................................418
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................414
Phone Menu.........................................................415
Receiving Calls.....................................................419
Smartphone Connectivity..................................421
Text Messaging...................................................420
Rear Parking Aid............................................192
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............127
Obstacle Detection...............................................75
Opening and Closing the Liftgate.....................74
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................75
Power Seats....................................................133
Rear Seats.......................................................137
Four Way Power Lumbar...................................135
Power Lumbar (Limo/Livery).............................135
Adjusting the Rear Seats...................................137
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................68
Power Liftgate..................................................74
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................295
Power Windows..............................................94
Accessory Delay...................................................95
Bounce-Back..........................................................94
Rear Under Floor Storage...........................231
Rear View Camera........................................199
Using the Rear View Camera System............199
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................199
568
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Rear Camera Washer...........................................85
Rear Window Washer..........................................85
Rear Window Wiper Blade.................................85
Recommended Towing Weights..............238
Refueling..........................................................167
Refueling System Overview..............................167
Refueling System Warning................................169
Refueling Your Vehicle.......................................168
R
Directing Air to the Overhead Air Vents or
Rear Footwell Air Vents.................................127
Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator...............127
Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed...........127
Setting the Rear Temperature..........................128
Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off.........128
Switching the Rear Climate Controlled Seats
On and Off........................................................128
Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and
Off.......................................................................128
Post-Crash Alert System............................252
Power Door Locks
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............85
Remote Control...............................................60
Car Finder................................................................61
Intelligent Access Key.........................................60
Memory Feature....................................................63
Remote Start...........................................................61
Replacing the Battery..........................................60
Sounding the Panic Alarm...................................61
Remote Start...................................................129
Automatic Settings..............................................129
Removing a Headlamp...............................300
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................310
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs.....................................................13
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.........................13
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................63
Index
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................261
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......260
Roadside Assistance...................................248
Seatbelts...........................................................38
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................249
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................248
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................248
Conditions of operation......................................44
Special Notices.................................................13
Seats.................................................................130
Security..............................................................77
Settings...........................................................436
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
Roadside Emergencies...............................248
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................245
Running Out of Fuel.....................................166
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................166
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................166
S
Safety Canopy™...............................................55
Safety Precautions........................................164
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............490
Scheduled Maintenance.............................479
Seatbelt Extension..........................................47
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................43
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................45
Principle of Operation..........................................38
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................44
911 Assist...............................................................444
Ambient Lighting................................................453
Bluetooth..............................................................439
Clock......................................................................438
Display...................................................................455
General.................................................................450
Media Player........................................................437
Mobile Apps.........................................................449
Navigation............................................................446
Phone....................................................................439
Radio......................................................................445
SiriusXM................................................................446
Sound....................................................................436
Valet Mode...........................................................456
Vehicle...................................................................453
Voice Control.......................................................455
Wi-Fi & Hotspot....................................................451
Side Airbags.....................................................54
Sitting in the Correct Position....................130
Belt-Minder™...........................................................45
569
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................328
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................333
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................487
Exceptions............................................................489
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................203
Stability Control.............................................190
Principle of Operation........................................190
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................159
Automatic Engine Shutdown.............................161
Failure to Start......................................................160
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes..................162
Important Ventilating Information...................162
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................161
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary...........................................................161
Starting and Stopping the Engine.............158
General Information............................................158
Index
Steering..........................................................225
Electric Power Steering....................................225
Steering Wheel................................................80
Storage Compartments...............................156
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................98
Sun Visors.........................................................97
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.....................................98
Traction AA A B C................................................316
Treadwear.............................................................316
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............329
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System........................................330
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................330
Tires
Supplementary Restraints System.............49
See: Wheels and Tires.......................................313
Principle of Operation..........................................49
Towing a Trailer.............................................237
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
SYNC™ 3..........................................................369
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........243
General Information...........................................369
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting..........................456
Load Placement..................................................237
Emergency Towing............................................243
Recreational Towing..........................................244
T
Towing.............................................................237
Traction Control.............................................189
Technical Specifications
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).........................256
Tire Care..........................................................315
Trailer Sway Control....................................238
Transmission Code Designation..............348
Transmission...................................................175
Transporting the Vehicle............................253
Type Approvals.............................................547
Glossary of Tire Terminology............................317
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................315
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................318
Temperature A B C..............................................316
Radio Frequency Certification for Keys and
Remote Controls............................................559
Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind Spot
Information System.......................................556
Radio Frequency Certifications for Body
Control Module..............................................559
See: Capacities and Specifications...............343
Principle of Operation........................................189
570
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise
Control Module..............................................558
Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid Range
Radar.................................................................550
Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive
Anti-Theft System...........................................551
Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio
Transceiver Module.......................................554
Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC
3.........................................................................558
Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)...................547
Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless
Charging..........................................................558
Radio Frequency Statement for Audio
Unit....................................................................559
U
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................283
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L.....................284
Universal Garage Door Opener................149
HomeLink Wireless Control System...............149
USB Port..........................................................367
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................204
Automatic Cancellation.....................................207
Blocked Sensor..................................................209
Canceling the Set Speed.................................207
Index
Changing the Set Speed..................................207
Detection Issues.................................................208
Following a Vehicle...........................................205
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................208
Overriding the Set Speed................................207
Resuming the Set Speed..................................207
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed...............205
Setting the Gap Distance.................................206
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off........208
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On........205
Switching to Normal Cruise Control................211
System Not Available........................................209
Using All-Wheel Drive..................................179
Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive (AWD).......................................................181
Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched
Tires.....................................................................181
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires...................................................................180
Using Cruise Control...................................203
Canceling the Set Speed.................................204
Changing the Set Speed..................................203
Resuming the Set Speed.................................204
Setting the Cruise Speed.................................203
Switching Cruise Control Off...........................204
Switching Cruise Control On...........................203
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................66
Using Snow Chains......................................328
Using Stability Control..................................191
Using Traction Control.................................189
Switching the System Off..................................189
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........189
Using a Switch.....................................................189
Using the Information Display Controls........189
Using Voice Recognition............................386
Audio Voice Commands...................................388
Climate Voice Commands................................389
Mobile App Voice Commands........................394
Navigation Voice Commands..........................392
Phone Voice Commands..................................389
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands......................................................394
Voice Settings Commands..............................395
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................257
V
Vehicle Care..................................................303
General Information...........................................303
Vehicle Certification Label.........................347
Vehicle Identification Number...................347
Vehicle Storage...............................................311
Battery....................................................................312
Body.........................................................................311
571
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing
Brakes....................................................................312
Cooling system....................................................312
Engine.....................................................................311
Fuel system............................................................311
General....................................................................311
Miscellaneous......................................................312
Removing Vehicle From Storage.....................312
Tires........................................................................312
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................125
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............347
Voice Control....................................................81
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...................101
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................101
Airbag Readiness.................................................101
Anti-Lock Braking System..................................101
Battery.....................................................................101
Brake System Warning Light............................102
Charging System.................................................102
Cruise Control......................................................102
Direction Indicator..............................................102
Door Ajar...............................................................102
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................102
Engine Oil..............................................................102
Index
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp.......................103
Front Fog Lamps.................................................103
Head Up Display.................................................103
High Beam............................................................103
Liftgate Ajar...........................................................103
Low Fuel Level.....................................................103
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................103
Low Washer Fluid................................................103
Parking Lamps......................................................103
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power......103
Service Engine Soon..........................................103
Stability Control...................................................104
Stability Control Off.............................................104
Washer Fluid Check....................................295
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................304
Waxing............................................................305
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................333
Wheels and Tires...........................................313
General Information............................................313
Technical Specifications...................................340
Windows and Mirrors.....................................94
Windshield Washers.......................................84
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................297
Wipers and Washers......................................84
572
MKT (TP4) , enUSA, Edition date: 201803, Second-Printing